64909958-job-aid

336
Alcatel-Lucent - Proprietary This Document contains proprietary information of Alcatel-Lucent and is not to be disclosed or used except in accordance with applicable agreements. Copyright © 2007 Alcaltel-Lucent Unpublished and Not for Publication All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent Services Remote Maintenance Tool Job Aid (RMT 29.0) November, 2007

Upload: cutterjambrong

Post on 29-Dec-2015

66 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

DESCRIPTION

Utamakan keselamatan kerja

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent - Proprietary This Document contains proprietary information of

Alcatel-Lucent and is not to be disclosed or used except in accordance with applicable agreements.

Copyright © 2007 Alcaltel-Lucent

Unpublished and Not for Publication All Rights Reserved

Alcatel-Lucent Services Remote Maintenance Tool Job Aid (RMT 29.0) November, 2007

Page 2: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid ii November, 2007

Copyright © 2007 Alcatel-Lucent All Rights Reserved Printed in U.S.A. This document has been developed by the Alcatel-Lucent RAN Methods Organization. This document is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be reproduced, distributed, or altered in any fashion by any entity, including other Alcatel-Lucent Business Units or Divisions, without the expressed written consent of the Alcatel-Lucent Global RAN Methods Organization.

Accuracy

Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, the information is subject to change.

FCC Warning

The equipment described in this document has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with this document, may cause interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his/her own expense.

Security

In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through the use of remote access features. In such events, applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Alcatel-Lucent cannot be responsible for charges and will not make allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.

Trademarks

Agilent is a registered trademark of Agilent Technologies. FLEXENT is a registered trademark of Alcatel-Lucent. Hewlett Packard is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard. HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard. Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. VERSA is a registered trademark of NEC Technologies Inc. Windows 95/98/NT/2000/XP is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Page 3: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 1 November, 2007

ABOUT THIS INFORMATION PRODUCT

RMT 29.0 Job Aid Section JA001 OVERVIEW

General Information

This information product is a collection of job aid instructions that provide procedures for using the Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT), Release 29.0 with the OneBTS CDMA base station platforms. This job aid does not cover all of the operations that can be performed with RMT. With the use of the embedded RMT On-Line HELP menus, many of the operations available with RMT are self explanatory and therefore not covered within this document. The information provided herein is designed to assist the user in performing maintenance activities, using RMT. Verification and configuration of the EEPROM backplane parameters, including BTS Parameters, CSU/ATM Parameters, Unit Type Descriptors, RF Path Maps, and RF Test Path Maps are the primary areas covered within this document.

Reference to the CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual

This Job Aid does not include RF Power Calibration procedures. All RF Power Calibration procedures performed with RMT are now included in the CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual(s). CDMA RF Power Calibration Manuals can be accessed at:

https://wireless.support.lucent.com/amps/

login with valid user name and password,

select: Release Information

select: CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual

Continued on next page

Page 4: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 2 November, 2007

Overview, Continued

Reason for Issue Updated for RMT Release 29.0 features. Reformatted Job Aid layout. Combined HD and Modcell backplane programming procedures into common sections. Removed remote connection information and procedures using RMT via VPN connection from cell site to MSC.

Safety Labels DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION are safety labels used in this information product. They are listed below in order of priority and have the following meanings:

DANGER indicates the presence of a hazard that will cause death or severe personal injury if the hazard in not avoided.

WARNING indicates the presence of a hazard that can cause death or severe personal injury if the hazard is not avoided.

CAUTION indicates the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury or property damage if the hazard is not avoided.

Intended Audience

The RMT Job Aid is intended for use by field technicians performing OA&M activities on the OneBTS CDMA base station products. This product line includes but is not limited to the following systems:

CDMA Modcell 4.0/4.0B HD 4.0/4.0B Base Station 8401 Base Station 8420 Base Station 8440 Base Station 4400 Base Station 2400 Compact 4.0/4.0B Compact RU/BU

To use this information product effectively, the technician must have a general understanding of the OneBTS CDMA base station platforms and a general understanding of wireless telecommunications technology.

Continued on next page

Page 5: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 3 November, 2007

Overview, Continued

Recommended Customer Training and Other Documentation

Customer training for the OneBTS CDMA base station platforms is available through the Alcatel-Lucent Training Organization. Training course CL5690 is recommended to be completed prior working on the base station equipment. Operations, Administration and Maintenance Manual (401-703-407) provides detailed OA&M information and instructions for the CDMA Modcell 4.0 platforms. CDMA Translation Application Note #1-F describes the RF Transmit Path and provides details on the adjustments to the translations that govern the verification and calibration of the forward link transmit power. Wireless Networks CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Radio Access System Planning & Implementation Guide 401-614-101 Wireless Networks CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Base Station Operation, Administration, and Maintenance 401-614-104

Wireless Networks CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Radio Networks Controller Application Processor Operations, Administration & Maintenance 401-614-102

Alcatel-Lucent CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual:

• 401-703-437 CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for Mod 4.0/4.0B and Compact 4.0/4.0B

• 401-703-438 CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual for HD 4.0

How to order Information Products for the OneBTS CDMA platforms can be ordered via telephone or by mail. In most cases, information products must be ordered by the Documentation Coordinator of your company and in accordance with contractual agreements with Alcatel-Lucent. Order By Telephone: To order information products by telephone, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent Customer Information Center (CIC) at the following numbers:

• Telephone: 1 888 582 3688 Facsimile: 1 800 566 9568

Order By Mail: To order documents by mail, please send orders to:

• Alcatel-Lucent Customer Information Center Order Entry Section 2855 N. Franklin Road P.O. Box 19901 Indianapolis, IN 46219 USA

Continued on next page

Page 6: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 4 November, 2007

Overview, Continued

Assumptions The procedures in this document assume that the RMT software is available for use and that the OneBTS CDMA platform to be tested has been properly installed and commissioned.

RMT Support CommNet International and CommNet provide the necessary support for installing and configuring RMT on the laptop computer. CommNet International can be reached at: (800) 345-5303.

RMT Key Activation

First time users are required to obtain an RMT activation key. The following provides instructions for obtaining a key. RMT activation keys can be accessed 24 hours a day, 7 days a week at:

https://wireless.support.lucent.com/amps/

login with valid user name and password,

select: Wireless AMPS/PCS,

select: Utilities/Tools

select: RMT Activation Key Tool

From this site the Customer will be required to provide the following: • A standing order number (SO#). The SO# is a 9-digit number that can be found on

the label of the RMT software CD-ROM. It can also be found on the packing slip. • An RMT machine ID number. This is obtained when the RMT is first loaded on a PC.

When the dialog box appears the machine ID is displayed.

The site contains easy-to-follow, detailed instructions that walk the customer through the key activation process. Activation keys can also be obtained by telephone from the CIC. See How to order in this section for contact numbers.

On-line Help In addition to the RMT Job Aid and the Alcatel-Lucent CDMA RF Power Calibration document, the RMT application features an on-line RMT Help Topic Menu that can be accessed while running an RMT session. This on-line help provides descriptions and procedural instructions for running all of the features available with RMT. As noted earlier, this document does not cover all operations that can be performed with RMT. With the use of the On-Line HELP menus, many of the operations available are self explanatory and therefore not covered here.

Continued on next page

Page 7: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 5 November, 2007

Overview, Continued

How to use this Information Product

This job aid is divided into five sections with each section defining separate procedures used to perform specific RMT functions. The Series numbering scheme for each section is shown in the table below: Note: If using an electronic copy of this document, press the Ctrl key and click on the desired section to automatically go to that section. Hyperlinks are designated in the blue underscored font.

Section Series Section Title

JA000 ABOUT THIS INFORMATION PRODUCT page 1

JA100 RMT TEST SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND SETUP page 7

JA200 BOOT MEMORY PARAMETERS page 41

JA300 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTOR BACKPLANE PARAMETERS page 85

JA400 BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP BACKPLANE PARAMETERS page 159

JA500 BTS RF TEST PATH MAP BACKPLANE PARAMETERS page 251

JA600 RF POWER CALIBRATION PROCEDURES page 333

Page 8: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 6 November, 2007

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 9: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 7 November, 2007

RMT TEST SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND SETUP

RMT 29.0 Job Aid Section JA100

GENERAL INFORMATION

Purpose This section provides information for test equipment needed to perform the procedures

specified in this job aid and provides procedures for installing and configuring RMT on the laptop computer. Note: If using an electronic copy of this document, click on the desired section to automatically access that section. The following procedures are provided in this section:

Section/Description

Section JA110 - List of Required Test Equipment page 9

Section JA120 - Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT) Laptop Configuration page 11

Page 10: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 8 November, 2007

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 11: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 9 November, 2007

RMT Test System Description and Setup

Section JA110 - List of Required Test Equipment

GENERAL

Section Description

This section specifies the installation test equipment required to perform the procedures defined in this job aid.

REQUIRED TEST EQUIPMENT

Test Equipment List

The following table lists the required test equipment to be used to perform the test procedures defined in this job aid.

Table 1: OneBTS CDMA Base Station Test Equipment List

Qty Description 1

Fujitsu LifeBook E Series Multiple Applications Computer (MAC) OR Similar platform

1 Modular “Crossover” Ethernet Cable (see pin-out below)

1 ESD Wrist Strap

Page 12: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 10 November, 2007

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 13: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 11 November, 2007

RMT Test System Description and Setup

Section JA120 - Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT) Laptop Configuration and Start-Up

GENERAL

Section Description

This section provides the procedures to set-up, maintain and initialize the Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT) on the laptop computer. This information is also provided in the RMT Installation and Configuration Guide that is provided with the RMT software CD-ROM.

About RMT RMT is a software application that runs on a personal laptop computer. RMT interfaces with the cell hardware and provides the ability to perform various configuration and diagnostic functions on the cell hardware. Communication occurs through an Ethernet connection between the laptop computer and the cell equipment.

Hardware Requirements

Computers should meet the following hardware requirements to run the RMT application:

• Intel Pentium 200 MHz MMX Processor (or later, which can be purchased from CommNet International)

• 256 MB of RAM • 500 MB of Hard Disk Space • 1024x768, 256 Color Display • Ethernet, 10/100 BaseT card (equivalent) • Ethernet Cross-over Cable (or equivalent, which can be purchased from CommNet

International)

Application Software Requirements

Your computer should meet the following software requirements: Windows 2000 with Administrative Rights Windows XP with Administrative Rights • Internet Explorer 4.72.3110.8, SP1

Obtaining RMT: Self-Install Customers

Self-install customers can obtain the RMT software from the Alcatel-Lucent Customer Support Center web site at: https://wireless.support.lucent.com/amps/ut_tools/rmtsoft/ Note: A Self-Install license is required before purchasing RMT. Contact your Account Executive or Customer Technical Advocate for more information on purchasing RMT.

RMT Release Information

The RMT Software Release Notes describe the features that were added to the respective software release. The filename is Rnotes.doc (Word format) and is loaded to the computer when RMT is loaded. The document can be found in the following directory:

• X:\Program Files\Lucent Technologies\RMT\bin. Where X = drive letter where the RMT software is loaded (normally the C:drive).

Page 14: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 12 November, 2007

INSTALLING RMT SOFTWARE

Installation Procedure

RMT Self-install Customers should refer to the RMT Installation and Configuration Guide that is supplied with the RMT software for software installation procedures. Note: If there is a prior version of RMT on the laptop, this version must be removed prior to installing the R29.0 load. Go to the Remove Previous RMT Versions steps below.

Remove Previous RMT Versions

Follow the steps below to manually remove any previous versions of the RMT software prior to installing this or any other version of the RMT.

Step Action

1 Open the Start menu and select Settings | Control Panel and double-click on Add/Remove Programs.

2 In the Add/Remove Programs Window, scroll through the list and check for any instance of the RMT. Select each instance and press the Add/Remove button to remove the program.

3 When finished, close the Add/Remove Programs window and the Control Panel Window and proceed with the RMT installation procedures.

Alcatel-Lucent Issued RMT Key

There are two RMT keys needed for RMT. The first issued Alcatel-Lucent Key is required to access RMT software. The second key is needed to access the CSU/ATM Parameters window. The second key is only available to licensed self-install customers. Customers with the “Maintenance Only” version of RMT do not have access to the second key. Self-install customers can generate and retrieve keys by performing the following steps.

Step Action

1 After installing RMT and starting the program for the first time, a dialog box appears displaying an RMT ID and requesting an Alcatel-Lucent Issued Key. The RMT ID is a unique 10-digit number generated when RMT software is installed.

2 Open a web browser and proceed to the Alcatel-Lucent Customer Support Center web site: https://wireless.support.lucent.com/

3 Enter your user name and password, then click Submit.

4 Scroll down through the links on the left side of the screen and click on: Utilities and Tools (Wireless)

5 Scroll down through the Utilities/Tools in the right column and click on: RMT ACTIVATION KEY Tool

6 Follow the directions on the web page to generate an RMT key using your STANDING ORDER NUMBER and the RMT ID from Step 1 above. Enter this key on the RMT dialog box. Important! The STANDING ORDER NUMBER is a unique 9-digit number assigned to your RMT software purchase and delivered via email.

7 From the RMT main window select Config Authorize Self Install.

Continued on next page

Page 15: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 13 November, 2007

INSTALLING RMT SOFTWARE, Continued

Alcatel-Lucent Issued RMT Key (continued)

Step Action

8 An RMT authorization appears with a Machine ID. Use the Machine ID and generate the second key needed to access the Boot Memory Parameters by following the procedures in step 6. Enter the second key and click Authorize Self Install. When the second key is successfully entered the Authorize Self-Install button will be grayed out as shown below.

RMT Technical Questions

For questions about obtaining RMT activation keys, call 888-582-3688, prompt #4, then prompt #1 (USA). This number is staffed Monday-Friday from 7:30 AM until 4:00 PM central time. Or, send email to [email protected]. Please include your company name, contact information, and standing order number in your email. For technical questions or assistance installing RMT software, contact CommNet International at 888-345-2611 (USA and Canada) or 856-719-8463.

Replacing a Computer

If you previously have installed and activated the RMT software on a PC and are now replacing that PC and need to install and activate the software on a new PC, you will not be able to obtain a new activation key for the new PC from this web site. You must contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Executive to request an activation key for the new PC.

Machine ID is shown here

Maint Key is entered here

Page 16: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 14 November, 2007

CONFIGURATION AID (CA100) INSTALLATION

Configuration Aid CA100

In addition to RMT, the Configuration Aid CA100 provides the RMT user with a set of cabinet configuration drawings and the associated .xml files that support the various configurations. The following provides steps for accessing and installing the CA100.

Downloading & Installing the CA-100

The CDMA Configuration Aid (CA 100) provides overview information for many common CDMA Base Station configurations. The document does not cover every possible configuration of every product. The document includes information on backplane programming, power calibration, and other miscellaneous configuration information. Licensed Self-Install Customers and Alcatel-Lucent Installation can download the CA 100 document from the CIC, http://www.cic.lucent.com. Embedded in the document are .xml files that are used for programming the following backplane parameters:

Unit Type Descriptor (UTD) Primary RF Path Map (PRIM RF PM) RF Test Path Maps (TDU RF TEST PM and MCR RF TEST PM)

Follow the instructions on the first page of the CA-100 document to extract the packaged .xml files. Once extracted to the pc, the bundled CA-100 .xml files are placed in the following directory:

C:\Program Files\Lucent Technologies\RMT\config\1bts\Config Aid

Page 17: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 15 November, 2007

LAPTOP NETWORK SETTINGS

Static IP Address

When running RMT software, the laptop IP address must be set to 192.168.168.250. The procedure below explains how to set the laptop IP address for Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems.

Windows 2000 or Windows XP Operating System

Use the following steps to set the laptop IP address for a Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating system.

Step Action

1 For Windows 2000 insert a PCMCIA Network Interface Card (NIC). NOTE: Windows XP operating systems do not use a NIC card.

2 On the computer desktop, right click on My Network Places and select Properties. NOTE: For some MACs, access My Network Places by: Start My Network Places

3 On the Network Connections window, right click on Local Area Connection and select Properties. NOTE: For some MACs, it is necessary to click View Network Connections in order to access Local Area Connection.

4 On the Local Area Connection Property window, ensure that all of the following items are installed and checked:

Client for Microsoft Networks File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)

5 Highlight Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click Properties.

6 On the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window, select Use the following IP address: and enter the following values:

IP Address: 192.168.168.250 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway: blank

Click OK.

7 On the Local Area Connection Property window, click OK.

8 On the Network Connections window, click File and then select Close.

9 On the desktop, click Start Shutdown, then, on the dropdown menu, select Restart to re-boot the computer.

Continued on next page

Page 18: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 16 November, 2007

LAPTOP NETWORK SETTINGS, Continued

IP Address Verification (all Operating Systems)

Perform the following steps to verify the laptop IP address.

Step Action

1 Power up the MAC

2 Click Start Run.

3 Enter cmd, then click OK

4 In the MS DOS window, enter: ipconfig

5 Verify the response lists the correct IP address for the Ethernet adapter for the Local Area Network: Example: C:\>ipconfig Windows 2000 IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection x: IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 192.168.168.250 Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.255.255.0

.

6 Determine if IP address is correct:

IF the IP address is ... THEN ...

192.168.168.250 The IP address for the laptop is configured correctly. Go to Step 7.

Other than 192.168.168.250 The IP address is incorrect. Reset the laptop IP address as explained previously on page 15, restart the laptop, then repeat this verification procedure.

7 Enter exit to exit MS DOS window.

8 Proceed with RMT INITIALIZATION on the next page.

Page 19: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 17 November, 2007

RMT INITIALIZATION

RMT Initialization and Connection

RMT supports both On-Line and Off-Line connections to the Base Station. The user must determine which connection method to use depending on the desired maintenance activity.

On-Line RMT Connection

An On-line Connection is where the Base Station is booted to the MSC/RNC and RMT is used to monitor certain status screens and current backplane settings of the Base Station.

Off-Line RMT Connection

An Off-line Connection is where the Base Station is booted to RMT (disconnected from the MSC) and RMT is used to set-up and perform various procedures, such as backplane settings and Off-line RF power calibration procedures. CAUTION: The “Off-line” connection is service affecting.

Determine Type of RMT Connection

Use the following procedures to determine the RMT connection type.

Step Action

1 Determine the type of RMT connection:

IF an …. THEN go to…

Off-Line RMT connection is desired…..

DISCONNECT THE FRAME FROM THE MSC/RNC on the next page.

On-Line RMT connection is desired…..

RMT CONNECTION on page 19.

Page 20: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 18 November, 2007

DISCONNECT THE FRAME FROM THE MSC/RNC

Inhibit Routine Diagnostics

Use the following procedure to inhibit routine diagnostics on the cell.

Step Action

1 Determine whether to inhibit routine diagnostics:

IF this is ... THEN ...

an IN-SERVICE cell go to Step 2.

NOT an IN-SERVICE cell go to T1 / E1 Facilities Disconnection below.

2 Open a Craftshell or TICLI terminal session.

3 Type the following command: inh:cell a,rtdiag

4 Verify the following response: M 23 INH:CELL a RTDIAG, COMPLETED

5 Proceed to T1 / E1 Facilities Disconnection below.

T1 / E1 Facilities Disconnection

Follow these procedures to disconnect the facilities between the frame and MSC / RNC.

Step Action

1 Remove the T1/E1 for the frame.

IF the frame type is… THEN…

Outdoor Modcell 4.0/4.0B Remove the T1/E1 lightning protectors in the Frame for the URC you want to connect to.

Indoor Modcell 4.0/4.0B, HD 4.0/4.0B, or Base Station

8401/8420/8440

Disconnect the facilities at the hatch-plate on the top of the cabinet. NOTE: If not accessible, then disconnect the facilities at the IOU/IOU4.

Outdoor Compact 4.0/4.0B Disconnect the E1/T1 cable on the HIOU/CIOU

Indoor Compact 4.0/4.0B Disconnect the E1/T1 cable in the Junction Box at the side of the frame.

Base Station 4400 Disconnect E1 cable at J1 of the IOU1

Base Station 2400 Disconnect the E1/T1 cable(s) on the Signal Protection Module (SPM) at the side of the frame.

2 Go to RMT CONNECTION on the next page.

Page 21: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 19 November, 2007

RMT CONNECTION

Determine Which URC Controller to Connect To

Use the following procedure to determine which URC to connect to.

Step Action

1 Determine which URC to connect to:

IF the RMT testing is for a(n)… THEN connect to…

Voice only frame The first equipped Voice URC

EVDO only frame The EVDO URC

Mixed Mode (Voice & EVDO) for - RF calibration, or - Voice UTD / Path Map Updates

The first equipped Voice URC NOTE: Check with MSC personnel to determine which URC is the first voice URC.

Mixed Mode (Voice & EVDO) for - EVDO Boot Memory Parameter

Updates - EVDO UTD / Path Map Updates

The EVDO URC NOTE: Check with MSC personnel to determine which URC is the EVDO URC.

2 Go to RMT Physical Connection on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 22: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 20 November, 2007

RMT CONNECTION, Continued

RMT Physical Connection

Follow the procedure below to make the physical connections needed for RMT. NOTE: For this procedure the following definitions apply:

• a classic URC is a 44WA50/A or 44WW70/B (code located on faceplate) • a URC-II/B is a 44WW65/B (code located on faceplate)

Step Action

1 Determine where to connect the RMT laptop computer.

IF an Ethernet Hub...

AND the URC type is a...

THEN connect…

IS being used classic URC or URC-II/B

a cross-over OR straight Ethernet cable between the laptop and any available port on the Ethernet hub

classic URC

a cross-over Ethernet cable between the laptop and the Ethernet port on the PIM, IOU, CIOU, HIOU, or IOU1. See Figure 1 – Figure 5. is NOT being used

URC-II/B a cross-over Ethernet cable between the laptop and the Ethernet port on the faceplate of the URC-II/B

2 Set the Shelf ID Selector switch as follows:

NOTE: It is not necessary to set the Shelf ID Selector switch on BTS 2400 or BTS 4400.

IF the cabinet is a… THEN set the Shelf ID Selector Switch to…

Primary *0 Growth #1 *1 Growth #2 *2 Growth #3 *3

Notes: *See Figure 2 – Figure 4 for details on setting the Shelf Selector Switch

and Rotary Switch settings. It is not necessary to set the Shelf ID selector switch or URC rotary

switches for BS 2400 or BS 4400 units.

3 Set the URC Rotary Switch: NOTE: It is not necessary to set the URC Rotary Switch on BTS 4400

IF you are connecting to… THEN set the URC rotary switch to… a classic URC in slot 1 *1 a classic URC in slot 2 *2 a classic URC in slot 3 *3 a URC-II in any slot Don’t care (not necessary to set)

4 Go to RMT START UP on page 24.

Continued on next page

Page 23: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 21 November, 2007

RMT CONNECTION, Continued

Figure 1: Base Station 2400 Connections

E1/T1Connector

EthernetPort

URC Rotary Switch

I2C

Arcnet

10 2

3

45

67

8

9

102

34

5

6789

AB

CD

EF

Shelf ID SelectorSetting - Description: 0 - Primary 1 - Growth 1 2 - Growth 2

Figure 2: Modcell/HD 4.0/B, Base Station 8401, 8420 and 8440 IOU/IOU4 Connections

Continued on next page

Page 24: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 22 November, 2007

RMT CONNECTION, Continued

EthernetPort

Shelf ID Selector

E1/T1Connector

PowerLED

Setting: 0 - Compact

URC RotarySwitch

102

34

5

6789

AB

CD

EF

HIO

U

10

2 3 4 56

789

Term

Luce

nt44

WE

HIO

U

(map ofunit

jackfield)

J2

J1

J7

J8 J13

J17

J5

J9J6

J16

10

2

3 4

56

7

89

Figure 3: Compact 4.0 HIOU Connections and Switches

1

2

3

O N

Note: Slideswitches to the

Left for "1".

Note: Slideswitches to theRight for "0".

E1/T1Configuration (S1)

EthernetPort

Shelf ID Selector(S2)

E1/T1Connector

Pow erLED

Setting: 0 - Com pact

CIO

U

10

2 3 4 56

789

Term

URC RotarySw itch

(S3)

10

2

3 4 5

67

89

ABCD

EF

10

2

3 4

56

7

89

Luce

ntJ8

J7 J2J6J5J1

7

J13

J1

J4 J16J9

44W

ECIO

U

Figure 4: Compact 4.0 CIOU Connections and Switches

Continued on next page

Page 25: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 23 November, 2007

RMT CONNECTION, Continued

NO

T U

SED J6

J7

J9

J17

J16IOU

1

J1

Lucent

Ethernet Port for RMT Connection

E1 Facilities Connector

Figure 5: Base Station 4400 IOU1 Connections

Page 26: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 24 November, 2007

RMT START UP

RMT Initial Start Up

Use the following procedures for selecting an On-Line or Off-Line RMT connection.

IF an …. THEN go to…

On-Line RMT connection is desired…..

On-Line RMT Start-Up below.

Off-Line RMT connection is desired…..

Off-Line RMT Start-Up on page 27.

On-Line RMT Start-Up

Use the following procedures to start an On-Line RMT session.

Step Action

1 Boot the laptop computer

2 Double click the RMT Icon on the desktop of the computer. NOTE: A screen similar to the one shown below will appear. This is the RMT Main screen.

3 Proceed to Connect to URC on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 27: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 25 November, 2007

RMT START UP, Continued

Connect to URC Perform the following steps to connect to the Modcell via the RMT.

Step Action

1 Click CONNECT on the main RMT screen. The “Cell Connect Information” window should appear:

2 Click on the box, next to the “Cell Name” window, to ping the available URCs. The “IP Address” window should appear with a list of available URCs. NOTE: If you are connected to an Ethernet hub more than one URC may appear.

NOTE: If no URCs are displayed, then:

Your laptop may not be configured correctly for RMT You may not be using the appropriate cable (straight or cross-over).

Continued on next page

Page 28: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 26 November, 2007

RMT START UP, Continued

Connect to URC (continued)

Step Action

3 Select the desired URC from the list, and then click OK. You will return to the “Cell Connect Information” window, this time with the URC’s IP address in the “Cell Name” box:

4 Verify the desired IP Address is shown in the Cell Connect Information window and click OK to connect.

5 Verify the RMT is connected by checking the Status box as shown in the figure below: A green LED represents Connected

6 Procedure Complete.

7 Return to original procedure for verifying and/or setting backplane parameters.

Continued on next page

Page 29: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 27 November, 2007

RMT START UP, Continued

Off-Line RMT Start-Up

Use the following procedures to start an Off-Line RMT session.

Step Action

1 Boot the laptop computer

2 Double click the RMT Icon on the desktop of the computer. NOTE: A screen similar to the one shown below will appear. This is the RMT Main screen.

3 Proceed to RMT Version Check on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 30: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 28 November, 2007

RMT START UP, Continued

RMT Version Check

Use this procedure to determine which cell generic to boot the cell to.

Step Action

1 Click on Help -> About RMT… An “About RMT” window will appear with a list of cell generics, as shown in the example below. Note: The GA load will indicate RMT Release: 29.0.

2 Scroll down the list to view the packaged cell generics.

3 Determine which generic to boot to:

IF you are connecting to… THEN write down the Cell Generic Next to…

A Voice URC “CDMA2K GDF Name” (in this example the cell generic is: F2900DBFA.10). This is the desired cell generic you will need to boot to.

An EVDO URC “1xEV-DO GDF Name” (in this example the cell generic is: F2900EBFA.10). This is the desired cell generic you will need to boot to.

4 Click OK to close the “About RMT” window.

5 Go to Connect to URC on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 31: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 29 November, 2007

RMT START UP, Continued

Connect to URC Perform the following steps to connect to the Modcell via the RMT. NOTE: If you are running two RMT sessions (for RF power calibration with an Ethernet hub), you must perform this procedure in both RMT sessions (once for the primary frame, and once for the growth frame).

Step Action

1 Click CONNECT on the main RMT screen. The “Cell Connect Information” window should appear:

2 Click on the box (box with three dots), in the “Cell Connect Information” window, to ping the available URCs. The “IP Address” window should appear with a list of available URCs: NOTE: If you are using an Ethernet Hub, then two or more URCs will appear.

NOTE: If no URCs are displayed, then 1. The URC may be re-booting, try again in about 1 minute 2. Your laptop may not be configured correctly for RMT (see RMT Initialization

and Connection on page 17). 3. You may not be using the appropriate cable (straight or cross-over).

Continued on next page

Page 32: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 30 November, 2007

RMT START UP, Continued

Connect to URC (continued)

Step Action

3 Select the desired URC from the list, then click OK. You will return to the Cell Connect Information window, this time with the URC’s IP address in the “Cell Name” box:

4 Verify the desired IP Address (Refer to Table 2 on page 37) is shown in the Cell Connect Information window then click OK to connect.

5 Verify the RMT is connected by checking the Status box as shown in the figure below: A green LED represents Connected

6 If connection fails or there are other problems, refer to the TROUBLESHOOTING section on page 38.

7 Go to CELL GENERIC MANAGEMENT on the next page.

Page 33: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 31 November, 2007

CELL GENERIC MANAGEMENT

Cell Generic Verification via RMT

Perform the following steps to check which Modcell software generics are currently loaded on the Modcell. NOTE: If you are running two RMT sessions (for RF power cal with Ethernet hub), you must perform this procedure in both RMT sessions (once for the primary frame, and once for the growth frame).

Step Action

1 Click Flash Generics from the RMT main screen. The Select A Cell Technology window will appear.

2 Select the appropriate technology type then click OK. A Generic Management window, similar to the one shown below, will appear.

Continued on next page

Page 34: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 32 November, 2007

CELL GENERIC MANAGEMENT, Continued

Cell Generic Verification via RMT (continued)

Step Action

3 Check the Generic Names listed under the Cell portion (top half) of the window. These are the Generics that are currently on the URC you are connected to. In the example below, only voice (CDMA / CDMA2000) generics are listed. This is due to the CDMA / CDMA2000 cell technology being selected in step 2. If 1xEV-DO cell technology is selected, only EV-DO generics would be displayed.

4 Determine Generic State:

IF desired Generic is… THEN…

Displayed in the “Cell” portion (top half)

click Cancel, and then go to BOOT AND SOFTWARE ACTIVATION on Page 34.

not displayed in the “Cell” portion (top half)

go to Cell Generic Upload via RMT on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 35: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 33 November, 2007

CELL GENERIC MANAGEMENT, Continued

Cell Generic Upload via RMT

Perform the following procedures to upload a Generic from the RMT to the Modcell.

Step Action

1 Determine if there is enough memory on URC to upload desired cell generic.

IF URC (cell) currently has… THEN…

1 or fewer generics displayed There is enough memory. Go to Step 2

2 or more generics displayed There may NOT be enough memory: i. Select an unused generic under

Cell ii. Click Delete iii. Wait for generic to be deleted iv. Repeat Step 1

2 Select the desired cell generic from under the RMT portion of the window, then

click Upload

3 Click Yes in the Upload Generic window. The Package Status in the Cell window will show as “Loading”.

4 Wait until the Package Status in the Cell window changes from “Loading” to “Good”. NOTES: 1. The upload may take approximately 30 minutes or more to complete. 2. If the upload is interrupted for any reason:

a. Do NOT delete the generic b. Restart the upload, the upload will continue where it left off.

5 Click Cancel.

6 Go to BOOT AND SOFTWARE ACTIVATION on the next page.

Page 36: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 34 November, 2007

BOOT AND SOFTWARE ACTIVATION

Boot Perform the following steps to boot the cell onto a call processing generic. NOTE: If you are running two RMT sessions (for RF power calibration with an Ethernet hub), you must perform this procedure in both RMT sessions (once for the primary frame, and once for the growth frame).

Step Action

1 Click Config Cell Boot from the RMT main screen. The following Boot Cell window will appear:

2 Select the desired generic from the list by clicking on it.

3 Reboot the cell:

IF connected to… THEN…

a voice URC Click Reset -> Active URC

an EVDO URC Place a check mark next to the UCU (CMU) slot(s) that contain(s) the EVT (BNJ47B) and/or the SB-EVM (BNJ82) board, then click Reset -> Active URC

Continued on next page

Page 37: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 35 November, 2007

BOOT AND SOFTWARE ACTIVATION, Continued

Boot (continued)

Step Action

4 Click OK when the “Boot Cell” dialogue window appears:

5 Wait 5 minutes until the URC boot is complete.

6 Click CONNECT on the RMT window.

7 Click OK in the Cell Connect Information window.

8 Verify that the Status is Connected.

9 Proceed to Update NVM and BootROMs on the next page.

Page 38: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 36 November, 2007

UPDATING NVM AND BOOTROMS

Update NVM and BootROMs

Use the following procedure to update the BootROMs on various components of the Modcell. NOTE: If you are running two RMT sessions (for RF power calibration with an Ethernet hub), you must perform this procedure in both RMT sessions (once for the primary frame, and once for the growth frame).

Step Action

1 On the RMT main screen, click Config Cell Update BootROMs. The Version Sync window should appear as shown. Wait one minute for all the components to populate.

2 Check the status of each component equipped:

IF the Current Status is… THEN…

Running No update is necessary

Go to Step 3 NVM Mismatch Unit Needs update:

- Click the box under “Select for Update?” for components with NVM Mismatch

- Click Apply - Wait until Current Status changes to

Running - Go to Step 3

Downloading or Resetting Unit update is in progress - Wait until Current Status changes to

Running - Go to Step 3

3 Click Cancel to exit the Version Sync window. Procedure complete.

4 Return to original procedure for verifying and/or setting backplane parameters.

Page 39: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 37 November, 2007

URC IP ADDRESSES

General Starting with RMT 21.0, each URC has a unique local IP number. The RMT “Auto-Ping” feature will usually find the URC which the laptop is connected to; use the table below if the feature does not work. The IP number can simply be typed into the Cell Name field of the CELL Connect Information window. Also, the table can be used to cross-reference the IP address on the RMT Main screen display to the logical URC number.

Table 2: Modcell/HD/Compact 4.0/4.0B and BTS 4400/8420/8440 URC IP Addresses

Frame URC # IP Address

1 192.168.168.16

2 192.168.168.32

3 192.168.168.48 Primary

Spare 192.168.168.64

1 192.168.168.17

2 192.168.168.33

3 192.168.168.49 Growth 1

Spare 192.168.168.65

1 192.168.168.18

2 192.168.168.34

3 192.168.168.50 Growth 2

Spare 192.168.168.66

1 192.168.168.19

2 192.168.168.35

3 192.168.168.51 Growth 3

Spare 192.168.168.67

Page 40: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 38 November, 2007

TROUBLESHOOTING

Cannot Upload Generics to Cell Using RMT

If you are unable to upload cell generics from RMT to the controller in the cell, then refer to the table below for troubleshooting aid.

Possible Problem Solution / Action

Conflicting FTP Services running Perform Check for Other Running FTP Services below.

EVDO Access Terminal (AT) registry is corrupt / in conflict

If you have loaded software for an EVDO AT, then the software registry may be causing the problem. Currently, the only solution is to load RMT onto another laptop computer.

Check for Other Running FTP Services

Use the following procedure to see if other FTP services are running that are conflicting with RMT.

Step Action

1 Close RMT if it is running.

2 Click Start Run, then type CMD and press the Enter key

3 Type ftp localhost in the DOS command window.

4 If you see any other response than “Connection Refused”, there is an FTP server running on your computer. You must disable this FTP server before using the RMT to upload generics.

Disabling FTP Services

If you find FTP services running on your laptop, use the following steps to disable FTP services.

Step Action

1 Double-click on My Computer.

2 Double-click on Control Panel.

3 Double-click on Administrative Tools.

4 Double-click on Services.

5 Double-click on FTP Publishing Service.

6 Under Startup type, select Disable, then click Apply.

7 Reboot your computer.

Continued on next page

Page 41: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 39 November, 2007

TROUBLESHOOTING, Continued

Firewall Software Conflict

If you have ANY type of VPN software or FTP software operating on your computer, it is strongly recommended that you disable it. To disable the Alcatel-Lucent IPsec Client VPN firewall, use the following steps.

Step Action

1 Click on Start Alcatel-Lucent IPsec Client. NOTE: If Alcatel-Lucent IPsec Client cannot be found, then it most likely is not loaded on this computer.

2 Click on Firewall Allow All Traffic in the Alcatel-Lucent IPsec Client window.

3 Close the Alcatel-Lucent IPsec Client window.

RMT Ethernet Cables

When RMT is connected directly to a cell Ethernet port, a "crossover" cable is required. An Ethernet Crossover cable is an 8-pin cable with RJ48 connectors at each end and the following pin out:

Ethernet Crossover Cable Pin Out Pin 1 to Pin 3 Pin 2 to Pin 6 Pin 3 to Pin 1 Pin 6 to Pin 2 Pin 4 to Pin 4 Pin 5 to Pin 5 Pin 7 to Pin 7 Pin 8 to Pin 8

When RMT is connected to a cell through an Ethernet Hub (Ethernet Switch), a "straight" cable or a crossover cable may be used. An Ethernet Straight cable is an 8-pin cable with RJ48 connectors at each end and direct pin connections:

Ethernet Straight Cable Pin Out Pin 1 to Pin 1 Pin 2 to Pin 2 Pin 3 to Pin 3 Pin 6 to Pin 6 Pin 4 to Pin 4 Pin 5 to Pin 5 Pin 7 to Pin 7 Pin 8 to Pin 8

Page 42: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 40 November, 2007

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 43: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 41 November, 2007

BOOT MEMORY PARAMETERS

RMT 29.0 Job Aid Section JA200

GENERAL INFORMATION

Purpose This section describes procedures for verifying and setting Boot Memory Parameters. The Boot Memory Parameters are verified and set using RMT and are accessed via the pull-down menu as shown below. Boot Memory Parameters include the following:

BTS Parameters CSU/ATM Parameters BPSN/MAC Addresses

In conjunction with the on-line RMT HELP menu, the following procedures will aid the user in verifying and setting these backplane parameters. Note: Customers with the “Maintenance Only” version of RMT do not have access to these parameters. The following procedures are provided in this section:

Section/Description

Section JA210 – Verifying and Setting Boot Memory Parameters on page 43

Page 44: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 42 November, 2007

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 45: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 43 November, 2007

Boot Memory Parameters

Section JA210 – Verifying and Setting Boot Memory Parameters

GENERAL

Section Description

This section describes procedures for verifying and setting the BTS, CSU/ATM and the Backplane Serial Number and MAC Address backplane parameters. Note: Customers with the “Maintenance Only” version of RMT do not have access to these parameters. Boot Memory Parameters are verified and set using the Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT). It is assumed that the cell equipment has already been integrated and is in-service, meaning the backplane parameter programming was completed at the time of cell integration and commissioning. The procedures specified herein are to be performed if problems occur during the operation of the cell equipment or when updates need to be made to the existing BMP. Backplane parameters can be reviewed with the cell site either on-line or off-line via the RMT connection. It is highly recommended that whenever changes or updates are made to the backplane parameters that the cell is removed from service. Note: When creating or modifying .xml files always save a copy of the original file to the appropriate directory folder on your computer.

Page 46: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 44 November, 2007

FACILITIES DISCONNECTION

Introduction This section provides the procedures for disconnecting facilities from the cell. Facilities Disconnection

The connection between the switch and the cell must be removed before performing RMT standalone testing. Follow the procedures below to disconnect the facilities.

Step Action

1 Disconnect the facilities using one of the following methods:

• Disconnect the facilities at the demarcation point (SmartJack, NIU, or similar),

OR • Disconnect the facilities at the lightning protection point. OR • Disconnect facilities at the input/output unit (IOU). See Figures 1 – 5,

starting on page 21, for the various IOU types. OR • Disconnect the facilities at the top of the Indoor Cabinet (J101-J103).

See Figure 6 on page 45 for the Top View of the Input/Output Hatch Plate Panel.

2 Verify the URC faceplate LEDs are illuminated “RED” for all equipped T1 Spans.

Continued on next page

Page 47: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 45 November, 2007

FACILITIES DISCONNECTION, Continued

T1

J103

J102

J101

15MHz

GPS

ALARMBUS

Figure 6. Top View of Indoor Cabinet

Facilities Connector

Page 48: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 46 November, 2007

BEFORE GETTING STARTED

Select the BTS Procedure

Use the following table to go to the appropriate procedure.

IF updating a … THEN follow the …

Voice URC SETTING VOICE BTS PARAMETERS procedure on the next page.

1xEV-DO URC SETTING 1XEV-DO BTS PARAMETERS procedure on page 59.

Page 49: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 47 November, 2007

SETTING VOICE BTS PARAMETERS

Configure Voice BTS Parameters

Follow the procedure below to configure the Voice BTS Parameters.

Step Action

1 Make an OFFLINE connection to the cell’s voice controller (URC) with RMT. Refer to the RMT INITIALIZATION and RMT START UP procedures starting on page 17. NOTE: If this is the first time the RMT software is used, a pop up dialog box may appear asking for an Alcatel-Lucent issued key. Refer to Section JA120 for instructions for obtaining a password. See Alcatel-Lucent Issued RMT Key on page 12.

2 Click Config Cell Boot Memory Parameters BTS Parameters, from the RMT Connection Screen. The following BTS Parameters window appears:

Figure 7: Voice – BTS Parameters

Continued on next page

Page 50: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 48 November, 2007

SETTING VOICE BTS PARAMETERS, Continued

Configure Voice BTS Parameters (continued)

Step Action

3 Determine the URC to update.

IF updating CDM … THEN set “Select the URC you want to update” to …

1, 5, 9, or 13 1

2, 6, 10, or 14 2

3, 7, 11, or 15 3

NOTE: If updating a 1xEV-DO URC, then go to SETTING 1XEV-DO BTS PARAMETERS procedure on page 59.

4 Verify BTS Serial Number is set. NOTE: The BTS Serial Number is normally set by the factory and is unique to each Modcell. For most frame types, the BTS Serial Number (Alcatel-Lucent SN Barcode) can be found inside the cabinet on the top left of the side panel (left of the filters) or on the front door.

5 Set the GPS Antenna Length to Customer’s specified value. NOTE: This field must be set to +/- 50 feet of the actual antenna length.

6 Click Apply on the BTS Parameters Window.

7 Repeat Steps 3 – 6 for each equipped Voice URC.

8 Click Cancel to close the BTS Parameters window.

9 Proceed to SETTING VOICE CSU/ATM PARMETERS on page 49.

Continued on next page

Page 51: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 49 November, 2007

SETTING VOICE CSU/ATM PARMETERS

Configure Voice Trunk Group Controller Parameters

Follow the procedure below to configure the Voice Trunk Group Controller parameters.

Step Action

1 From the RMT main menu, click Config Cell Boot Memory Parameters CSU/ATM Parameters,. The following Configure Boot Memory Parameters window appears:

Figure 8: Voice – Trunk Group Controller Parameters (TGCP) Tab

Continued on next page

Trunk Group Controller

Parameters Tab Current

Controller

Record Version Number

Page 52: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 50 November, 2007

SETTING VOICE CSU/ATM PARMETERS, Continued

Configure Voice Trunk Group Controller Parameters (continued)

Step Action

2 Determine the CDM to update.

IF updating URC … THEN set “Select the URC you want to update” to …

1, 5, 9, or 13 1

2, 6, 10, or 14 2

3, 7, 11, or 15 3

NOTE: If updating the 1xEV-DO URC, then go to SETTING 1XEV-DO BTS PARAMETERS procedure on page 59.

3 Determine the current Version No. (located near the top of the window). Update to Version 4 as necessary:

IF the current Record

Version is …

THEN …

4 no update needed. Proceed to Step 4 on the next page.

0, 1, 2, or 3 use the procedure: RECORD VERSION UPGRADE on page 81 and then continue with step 4 on the next page. Do not exit the Configure Boot Memory Parameter window.

Continued on next page

Page 53: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 51 November, 2007

SETTING VOICE CSU/ATM PARMETERS, Continued

Configure Voice Trunk Group Controller Parameters (continued)

Step Action

4 Click Recall under TGCP Configuration File. NOTE: Recalling the XML file sets the TGM parameters to the default values shown in Table 11 on page 80. See CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS on page 71 for procedures on manually setting the CSU/ATM parameters if non-default TGM values are desired.

5 Select the TGCP files to recall using the following table.

IF the backhaul type is … THEN select the appropriate file listed in …

Frame Relay (FR) a) Table 3 on page 52 (make sure to navigate to correct directory for frame)

b) Proceed to Step 6.

*IPBH (IP Backhaul)

a) Table 4 on page 53 b) Proceed to Step 6

NOTE: If the file is not found, refer to CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS on page 71 to manually set the TGCP parameters. *NOTE: Cells using IPBH must also have correct backplane serial number and MAC address information programmed to all controller positions. Refer to BACKPLANE SERIAL NUMBER AND MAC ADDRESS on page 83 for verification and update procedures.

6 Click Open.

7 Click OK if the following pop-up windows appears:

8 Without exiting the Configure Boot Memory Parameter screen, proceed to Configure Voice Initial Link Configuration Parameters on page 54.

Continued on next page

Page 54: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 52 November, 2007

SETTING VOICE CSU/ATM PARMETERS, Continued

Configure Voice Trunk Group Controller Parameters (continued)

Table 3: Voice – TGCP Files for Frame Relay

File Location Lucent Technologies

RMTconfig

IEHBMP

VoiceModcell 4.0 – URC-URCII

Frame Relay – Voice [Ver 4]

C:\ Program Files

1bts

T1

E1

Frame Relay – Voice [Ver 4]

Growth 2

Growth 3

Growth 1

Primary

Growth 1

Growth 2Growth 3

Primary

URC 1 TGCP - CDM 1 - Frame Relay - T1 - Ver 4.xml

URC 2 TGCP - CDM 2 - Frame Relay - T1 - Ver 4.xml

T1:

URC 3 TGCP - CDM 3 - Frame Relay - T1 - Ver 4.xml

URC 1 TGCP - CDM 1 - Frame Relay - E1 - Ver 4.xml

URC 2 TGCP - CDM 2 - Frame Relay - E1 - Ver 4.xml

File Name (File names shown are for the Primary Frame Only) E1:

URC 3 TGCP - CDM 3 - Frame Relay - E1 - Ver 4.xml

NOTE: File names shown above are for the Primary Frame only. Navigate to the correct directory for the frame where the CDM is located (i.e. either Growth 1, Growth 2, Growth 3, or Primary). Recall the correct ILCP file for the CDM.

Continued on next page

Page 55: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 53 November, 2007

SETTING VOICE CSU/ATM PARMETERS, Continued

Table 4: Voice – TGCP Files for IPBH

File Location

URC 1 TGCP - CDM (1-5-9-13) - IPBH - T1 - Ver 4.xml

URC 2 TGCP - CDM (2-6-10-14) - IPBH - T1 - Ver 4.xml

T1:

URC 3 TGCP - CDM (3-7-11-15) - IPBH - T1 - Ver 4.xml

URC 1 TGCP - CDM (1-5-9-13) - IPBH – E1 - Ver 4.xml

URC 2 TGCP - CDM (2-6-10-14) - IPBH – E1 - Ver 4.xml

File Name

E1

URC 3 TGCP - CDM (3-7-11-15) - IPBH - E1 - Ver 4.xml

NOTE: Channel Associated Signaling (CAS) is not supported for IPBH. Any offices with CAS E1 framing will require a conversion to Common Channel Signaling (CCS) framing while still on FR prior to implementing IPBH.

Continued on next page

Page 56: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 54 November, 2007

SETTING VOICE CSU/ATM PARMETERS, Continued

Configure Voice Initial Link Configuration Parameters

Follow this procedure to verify or configure the Voice Initial Link Configuration Parameters.

Step Action

1 Click the Initial Link Configuration Parameters Tab.

Figure 9: Voice – Initial Link Configuration Parameters (ILCP) Tab

2 Click Recall under ILCP Configuration File.

Continued on next page

Initial Link Configuration

Parameters Tab Current

Controller

Page 57: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 55 November, 2007

SETTING VOICE CSU/ATM PARMETERS, Continued

Configure Voice Initial Link Configuration Parameters (continued)

Step Action

3 Select the ILCP files to recall using the following table:

IF the backhaul type is … THEN recall the file listed in …

Frame Relay (FR) a) Table 5 on page 57. b) proceed to Step 4

*IPBH (IP Backhaul)

a) Table 6 on page 58 b) proceed to Step 4

NOTE: If the file is not found, refer to CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS on page 71 to manually set the ILCP parameters. *NOTE: Cells using IPBH must also have correct backplane serial number and MAC address information programmed to all controller positions. Refer to BACKPLANE SERIAL NUMBER AND MAC ADDRESS on page 83 for verification and update procedures.

4 Click Open.

5 Click OK if the pop-up window below appears:

6 Click Apply on the “Configure Boot Memory Parameters” window and verify the response “Backplane Successfully Updated” appears.

7 Click Cancel to close “Configure Boot Memory Parameters” window.

8 Determine next procedure to execute.

IF … THEN …

another Voice URC needs updating

return to Configure Voice Trunk Group Controller Parameters on page 49.

no other Voice URC needs updating

proceed to Step 9 on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 58: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 56 November, 2007

SETTING VOICE CSU/ATM PARMETERS, Continued

Configure Voice Initial Link Configuration Parameters (continued)

Step Action

9 Determine next procedure to execute.

IF a 1xEV-DO URC is … …AND … THEN …

Boot Memory Parameters need to

be updated

a) Click DISCONNECT to disconnect RMT

b) execute the SETTING 1XEV-DO BTS PARAMETERS on page 59. equipped

no Boot Memory update is needed

proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 70.

not equipped N/A proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 70.

Continued on next page

Page 59: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 57 November, 2007

SETTING VOICE CSU/ATM PARMETERS, Continued

Configure Voice Initial Link Configuration Parameters (continued)

Table 5: Voice – ILCP Files for Frame Relay

File Location Lucent Technologies

RMTconfig

IEHBMP

VoiceModcell 4.0 – URC - URCII

Frame Relay – Voice [Ver 4]

C:\ Program Files

1bts

T1

E1

Frame Relay – Voice [Ver 4]

Growth 2

Growth 3

Growth 1

Primary

Growth 1

Growth 2Growth 3

Primary

URC 1 ILCP - CDM 1 - Frame Relay - T1 - Ver 4.xml

URC 2 ILCP - CDM 2 - Frame Relay - T1 - Ver 4.xml

T1:

URC 3 ILCP - CDM 3 - Frame Relay - T1 - Ver 4.xml

URC 1 ILCP - CDM 1 - Frame Relay - E1 - Ver 4.xml

URC 2 ILCP - CDM 2 - Frame Relay - E1 - Ver 4.xml

File Name (File names shown are for the Primary Frame Only)

E1:

URC 3 ILCP - CDM 3 - Frame Relay - E1 - Ver 4.xml

NOTE: File names shown above are for the Primary Frame only. Navigate to the correct directory for the frame where the CDM is located (i.e. either Growth 1, Growth 2, Growth 3, or Primary). Recall the correct ILCP file for the CDM.

Continued on next page

Page 60: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 58 November, 2007

SETTING VOICE CSU/ATM PARMETERS, Continued

Configure Voice Initial Link Configuration Parameters (continued)

Table 6: Voice – ILCP Files for IPBH

File Location Lucent Technologies

RMTconfig

IEH

BMPVoice

Modcell 4.0 -URC - URCII

IPBH -Voice [Ver 4]

1bts

T1

E1IPBH -Voice [Ver 4]

C: \ Program Files

URC 1 ILCP - CDM (1-5-9-13) - IPBH - T1 - Ver 4.xml

URC 2 ILCP - CDM (2-6-10-14) - IPBH - T1 - Ver 4.xml

T1:

URC 3 ILCP - CDM (3-7-11-15) - IPBH - T1 - Ver 4.xml

URC 1 ILCP - CDM (1-5-9-13) - IPBH – E1 - Ver 4.xml

URC 2 ILCP - CDM (2-6-10-14) - IPBH – E1 - Ver 4.xml

File Name

E1:

URC 3 ILCP - CDM (3-7-11-15) - IPBH - E1 - Ver 4.xml

Page 61: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 59 November, 2007

SETTING 1XEV-DO BTS PARAMETERS

Configure 1xEV-DO BTS Parameters

Follow the procedure below to configure the 1xEV-DO BTS Parameters.

Step Action

1 Make an OFFLINE connection to the cell’s voice controller (URC) with RMT. Refer to the RMT INITIALIZATION and RMT START UP procedures starting on page 17. NOTE: If this is the first time the RMT software is used, a pop up dialog box may appear asking for an Alcatel-Lucent issued key. Refer to Section JA120 for instructions for obtaining a password. See Alcatel-Lucent Issued RMT Key on page 12.

2 Click Config Cell Boot Memory Parameters BTS Parameters, from the RMT main menu. The following window will appear:

3 Verify the BTS Serial Number is set. NOTE: The BTS Serial Number is normally set by the factory and is unique to each Modcell. For most frame types the BTS Serial Number (Alcatel-Lucent SN Barcode) can be found inside the cabinet on the top left of the side panel (left of the filters) or on the front door.

Continued on next page

Page 62: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 60 November, 2007

SETTING 1XEV-DO BTS PARAMETERS, Continued

Configure 1xEV-DO BTS Parameters (continued)

Step Action

4 Set the GPS Antenna Length to Customer’s specified value. NOTE: This field must be set to +/- 50 feet of the actual antenna length.

5 Click Apply from the “BTS Parameters” Window.

6 Click Cancel to close the “BTS Parameters” window.

7 Proceed to SETTING 1XEV-DO CSU/ATM PARAMETERS on page 61.

Page 63: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 61 November, 2007

SETTING 1XEV-DO CSU/ATM PARAMETERS

Configure 1xEV-DO TGCP Parameters

Follow this procedure to configure the 1xEV-DO Trunk Group Controller Parameters.

Step Action

1 Click Config Cell Boot Memory Parameters CSU/ATM Parameters, from the RMT main menu. The following window will appear:

Figure 10: 1xEV-DO – Configure Boot Memory Parameters Screen

Continued on next page

Trunk Group Controller

Parameters Tab Current

Controller

Page 64: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 62 November, 2007

SETTING 1XEV-DO CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued

Configure 1xEV-DO TGCP Parameters (continued)

Step Action

2 Determine the current Version No. (located near the top of the screen). Update to Version 4 as necessary:

IF the current Record

Version is … THEN …

4 no update needed. Proceed to Step 3 below.

0, 1, 2, or 3

use the procedure: RECORD VERSION UPGRADE on page 81 and then continue with step 3. Do not exit the Configure Boot Memory Parameter window.

3 Click Recall under TGCP Configuration File.

NOTE: Recalling the XML file sets the T1/E1 TGM parameters to the default values in Table 11 on page 80. See CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS on page 71 for procedures on manually setting the CSU/ATM parameters if non-default TGM values are desired.

4 Select the TGCP files to recall using the following table:

IF the backhaul is THEN select the file listed in …

HDLC a) Table 7 on page 64. b) proceed to Step 5.

PPP for EVDO (also called MLPPP)

a) Table 8 on page 65. b) proceed to Step 5.

NOTE: If the file is not found, refer to CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS on page 71 to manually set the TGCP parameters.

5 Click Open.

Continued on next page

Page 65: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 63 November, 2007

SETTING 1XEV-DO CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued

Configure 1xEV-DO TGCP Parameters (continued)

Step Action

6 Click OK if the pop-up window below appears:

7 Proceed to Configure 1xEV-DO Initial Link Configuration Parameters on page 66.

Continued on next page

Page 66: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 64 November, 2007

SETTING 1XEV-DO CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued

Configure 1xEV-DO TGCP Parameters (continued)

Table 7: 1xEV-DO – TGCP Files for HDLC

File Location Lucent Technologies

RMTconfig

IEH

BMP

1xEV-Data

Modcell 4.0 – URC - URCII

HDLC for EVDO [Ver 4]

C:\ Program Files

1bts

E1

T1HDLC for EVDO [Ver 4]

URC 1 TGCP - HDLC -CDM (1-5-9-13) - 1xEV - T1 - Ver 4.xml

URC 2 TGCP - HDLC - CDM (2-6-10-14) - 1xEV - T1 - Ver 4.xml

T1:

URC 3 TGCP - HDLC - CDM (3-7-11-15) - 1xEV - T1 - Ver 4.xml

URC 1 TGCP - HDLC - CDM (1-5-9-13) - 1xEV - E1 - Ver 4.xml

URC 2 TGCP - HDLC - CDM (2-6-10-14) - 1xEV - E1 - Ver 4.xml

File Name

E1:

URC 3 TGCP - HDLC - CDM (3-7-11-15) - 1xEV - E1 - Ver 4.xml

Continued on next page

Page 67: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 65 November, 2007

SETTING 1XEV-DO CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued

Configure 1xEV-DO TGCP Parameters (continued)

Table 8: 1xEV-DO – TGCP Files for PPP

File Location Lucent Technologies

RMTconfig

IEH

BMP

1xEV-Data

Modcell 4.0 – URC - URCII

PPP for EVDO [Ver 4]

C:\ Program Files

1bts

E1

T1PPP for EVDO [Ver 4]

URC 1 TGCP - PPP -CDM (1-5-9-13) - 1xEV - T1 - Ver 4.xml

URC 2 TGCP - PPP - CDM (2-6-10-14) - 1xEV - T1 - Ver 4.xml

T1:

URC 3 TGCP - PPP - CDM (3-7-11-15) - 1xEV - T1 - Ver 4.xml

URC 1 TGCP - PPP - CDM (1-5-9-13) - 1xEV - E1 - Ver 4.xml

URC 2 TGCP - PPP - CDM (2-6-10-14) - 1xEV - E1 - Ver 4.xml

File Name

E1:

URC 3 TGCP - PPP - CDM (3-7-11-15) - 1xEV - E1 - Ver 4.xml

Page 68: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 66 November, 2007

SETTING 1XEV-DO CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued

Configure 1xEV-DO Initial Link Configuration Parameters

Follow this procedure to configure the 1xEV-DO Initial Link Configuration Parameters.

Step Action

1 Click the Initial Link Configuration Parameters Tab.

Figure 11: 1xEV-DO – Initial Link Configuration Parameters (ILCP)

Tab

2 Click Recall under ILCP Configuration File.

Continued on next page

Initial Link Configuration

Parameters Tab Current

Controller

Page 69: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 67 November, 2007

SETTING 1XEV-DO CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued

Configure 1xEV-DO Initial Link Configuration Parameters (continued)

Step Action

3 Select the ILCP file to recall using the following table:

IF the backhaul is … THEN select the file listed in …

HDLC a) Table 9 on page 68. b) proceed to Step 4.

PPP for EVDO (also called MLPPP)

a) Table 10 on page 69. b) proceed to Step 4.

NOTE: If the file is not found, refer to CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS on page 71 to manually set the TGCP parameters.

4 Click Open.

5 Click OK if the pop-up window below appears:

6 Click Apply on the “Configure Boot Memory Parameters” window.

7 Verify the “Backplane Successfully Updated” (text appears above the Apply Button).

8 Click Cancel to close the “Configure Boot Memory Parameters” window.

9 Determine the next procedure to execute.

IF a Voice URC is …

…AND … THEN …

Boot Memory Parameters need to

be updated

a) click DISCONNECT to disconnect RMT

b) proceed to SETTING VOICE BTS PARAMETERS on page 47.

equipped

no Boot Memory update is needed

Proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 70.

not equipped N/A Proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 70.

Continued on next page

Page 70: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 68 November, 2007

SETTING 1XEV-DO CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued

Configure 1xEV-DO Initial Link Configuration Parameters (continued)

Table 9: 1xEV-DO – ILCP Files for HDLC

File Location Lucent Technologies

RMTconfig

IEH

BMP

1xEV-Data

Modcell 4.0 – URC - URCII

HDLC for EVDO [Ver 4]

C:\ Program Files

1bts

E1

T1HDLC for EVDO [Ver 4]

URC 1 ILCP - HDLC - CDM (1-5-9-13) - 1xEV - T1 - Ver 4.xml

URC 2 ILCP - HDLC - CDM (2-6-10-14) - 1xEV - T1 - Ver 4.xml

T1

URC 3 ILCP - HDLC - CDM (3-7-11-15) - 1xEV - T1 - Ver 4.xml

URC 1 ILCP - HDLC - CDM (1-5-9-13) - 1xEV – E1 - Ver 4.xml

URC 2 ILCP - HDLC - CDM (2-6-10-14) - 1xEV – E1 - Ver 4.xml

File Name

E1

URC 3 ILCP - HDLC - CDM (3-7-11-15) - 1xEV - E1 - Ver 4.xml

Continued on next page

Page 71: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 69 November, 2007

SETTING 1XEV-DO CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued

Configure 1xEV-DO Initial Link Configuration Parameters (continued)

Table 10: 1xEV-DO – ILCP Files for PPP

File Location Lucent Technologies

RMTconfig

IEH

BMP

1xEV-Data

Modcell 4.0 – URC - URCII

PPP for EVDO [Ver 4]

C:\ Program Files

1bts

E1

T1PPP for EVDO [Ver 4]

URC 1 ILCP – PPP - CDM (1-5-9-13) - 1xEV - T1 - Ver 4.xml

URC 2 ILCP – PPP - CDM (2-6-10-14) - 1xEV - T1 - Ver 4.xml

T1

URC 3 ILCP – PPP - CDM (3-7-11-15) - 1xEV - T1 - Ver 4.xml

URC 1 ILCP – PPP - CDM (1-5-9-13) - 1xEV – E1 - Ver 4.xml

URC 2 ILCP – PPP - CDM (2-6-10-14) - 1xEV – E1 - Ver 4.xml

File Name

E1

URC 3 ILCP - PPP - CDM (3-7-11-15) - 1xEV - E1 - Ver 4.xml

Page 72: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 70 November, 2007

FINAL PROCEDURES

Disconnect RMT Follow the procedure below to complete the RMT testing procedure.

Step Action

1 Click DISCONNECT on the RMT screen.

2 Click File Exit.

3 Remove all test equipment connections from the cabinet. For example disconnect the crossover cable from the IOU/HIOU/CIOU.

4 Reconnect the T1/E1.

5 Reseat all the equipped URCs.

6 Secure the cabinet door.

Page 73: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 71 November, 2007

CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS

Trunk Group Controller Overview

The figure below shows an overview of the Trunk Group Controller for a controller. There are 6 possible trunk group controllers (TGC) per controller. However each controller uses only one TGC specified on the ILCP tab. Therefore only 1 TGC should be configured on the TGCP tab A TGM represents the T1/E1 facility. There are up to 8 Trunk Group Members (TGM) per TGC.

Figure 12: Trunk Group Controller Parameters (TGCP) Tab NOTE: Additional information about the Boot Memory Parameters can be found in the RMT Help Menu (Help Help Topics).

Continued on next page

Page 74: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 72 November, 2007

CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued

Connect with RMT

Step Action

1 Make an OFFLINE connection to the cell’s voice controller (URC) with RMT. Refer to the RMT INITIALIZATION and RMT START UP procedures starting on page 17. NOTE: If this is the first time the RMT software is used, a pop up dialog box may appear asking for an Alcatel-Lucent issued key. Refer to Section JA120 for instructions for obtaining a password. See Alcatel-Lucent Issued RMT Key on page 12.

2 Click on Cell Config Boot Memory Parameters CSU/ATM Parameters

3 Determine the URC to update.

IF updating CDM … THEN set “Select the URC you want to update” to …

1, 5, 9, or 13 1

2, 6, 10, or 14 2

3, 7, 11, or 15 3

4 Go to Set Trunk Group Controller Parameters below.

Set Trunk Group Controller Parameters

Follow the procedure below for setting Trunk Group Controller Parameters.

Step Action

1 Using the up/down arrows scroll through all 6 TGC Unit Id records (1-6) and set the Configured TGC field as follows:

IF the TGC Unit ID value… THEN …

matches the value in the field Select the URC you want to

update

Place a checkmark (√) in the Configured TGC field.

Does not match the value in the field Select the URC you

want to update

Make sure there is no check mark in the Configured TGC field.

Continued on next page

Page 75: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 73 November, 2007

CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued

Set Trunk Group Controller Parameters (continued)

Step Action

2 After completing step 1, set the TGC Unit ID to the value that matches the value in Select the URC you want to update. This must be the only TGC Unit ID where the field Configured TGC is checked (√).

3 Set the TGC Type to LIU.

4 Set the Clock Priority to 1.

5 Set the TGM Type to E1/T1

6 Go to Set Trunk Group Member Parameters on next page.

Continued on next page

In this example they are both set to 2 (for URC 2)

Page 76: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 74 November, 2007

CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued

Set Trunk Group Member Parameters

Use the following procedure to set the Trunk Group Member (TGM) parameters associated with the Trunk Group Controller (TGC).

Step Action

1 Set TGM Unit Id to 1.

2 Place a checkmark (√) in the Configured E1/T1 field.

NOTE: Each TGM (1-8) corresponds to a T1/E1 facility span (1-8). If the span is not present, it is still recommended to check (√) the Configured E1/T1 field.

3 Make sure there is no checkmark in the Enable Daisy Chain box.

4 Set the Mode according to the following table:

IF your cell is located in… THEN set the mode to…

North America (NAR) T1

Anywhere but NAR E1

5 Set the Line Coding according to the following table:

IF your mode is set to… THEN set your line coding to…

T1 AMI or B8ZS (customer defined)

E1 HDB3

Continued on next page

Page 77: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 75 November, 2007

CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued

Set Trunk Group Member Parameters (continued)

Step Action

6 Set the Framing Mode according to the following table:

IF your mode is set to…

…AND your line coding is set to…

THEN set your Framing mode to…

T1 AMI D4

T1 B8ZS ESF

E1 HDB3 NoCRC

7 Set Signaling according to the following table:

IF Mode is set to ... …AND using THEN set Signaling to ...

T1 Clear Channel (CCS) CCS/Clear Channel

Channel Associated Signaling (CAS)

CAS E1

Clear Channel (CCS) CCS/Clear Channel

8 Set the Rate to 64k

9 Set Long/Short Haul to Long.

10 Set Line Build Out / Equalization according to the following table:

IF your Mode is set to… THEN set your Line Build Out to…

T1 0 dB

E1 E1 LH

11 Set Time Slot Mask according to the following table:

IF Mode is set to… …AND Signaling is set to…

THEN set Time Slot Mask to…

T1 CCS/Clear Channel 0x00ffffff

CAS/Channel Associated Signaling

0xfffefffe E1

CCS/Clear Channel 0xfffffffe

12 Set the Clock Priority field to equal the TGM Unit ID (i.e. for TGM 1 set the Clock Priority to 1).

Continued on next page

Page 78: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 76 November, 2007

CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued

Set Trunk Group Member Parameters (continued)

Step Action

13 Place a checkmark (√) for the following Options: Enable Inband Loopbacks Enable Facility Data Link Loopbacks Enable ANSI PRMs Respond to AT&T FDL Msgs Enable Yellow Alarms

14 Set TGM Unit Id to 2 and then repeat steps 2-13.

15 Set TGM Unit Id to 3 and then repeat steps 2-13.

16 Set TGM Unit Id to 4 and then repeat steps 2-13.

17 Set TGM Unit Id to 5 and then repeat steps 2-13.

18 Set TGM Unit Id to 6 and then repeat steps 2-13.

19 Set TGM Unit Id to 7 and then repeat steps 2-13.

20 Set TGM Unit Id to 8 and then repeat steps 2-13.

21 Do not exit the Configure Boot Memory Parameters window. Proceed to Set Initial Link Configuration Parameters on page 77.

Continued on next page

Page 79: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 77 November, 2007

CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued

Initial Link Configuration Overview

The Initial Link Configuration Parameters tab is where the backhaul type is specified. Below shows a controller that has the backhaul set to Frame Relay.

Figure 13: Initial Link Configuration Parameters (ILCP) Tab

Set Initial Link Configuration Parameters

Follow the procedure below to set the Initial Link Configuration Parameters.

Step Action

1 Set the “Num of Links” field as follows:

IF the URC is for … THEN set “Num of Links:” to …

Frame Relay – Voice 2

IPBH – Voice 1

1xEV – PPP 1

1xEV – HDLC 4

2 Select the Init Unit Id of 1.

3 Select TGC to Use to match “Select the URC you want to update”.

Continued on next page

Page 80: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 78 November, 2007

CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued

Set Initial Link Configuration Parameters (continued)

Step Action

4 Set the following parameters as directed by the table below:

IF the URC is for …

THEN …

Frame Relay Voice

a) Set Link Type/App Id to Frame Relay. b) Set the DLCI value to the CDM#. (Example: DLCI is 1

for Primary URC1, DLCI is 2 for Primary URC2, and DLCI is 5 for Growth URC1).

c) Set the MAXW field to 8.

IPBH Voice

Or 1xEV - PPP

a) Set Link Type/App Id to PPP. b) Set the Data Rate to 64K. c) Set the Max Interfaces to 2. d) Set the Time Slot Mask to (0x00ffffff for T1, 0xfffffffe

for E1 with CCS). e) Uncheck Data Invert. (Customer may specify a

different setting for Data Invert). f) For IPBH set Mode to NONE. For 1xEV-PPP set Mode

to DHCP. g) Check all 8 Selected TGMs.

1xEV - HDLC a) Set Link Type/App Id to HDLC. b) Set TGM Unit ID to match Init Unit ID. c) Set the Data Rate to 64K. d) Set the Time Slot Mask (0x00ffffff for T1, 0xfffffffe for

E1 with CCS, 0xfffefffe for E1 with CAS). e) Uncheck Data Invert. (Customer may specify a

different setting for Data Invert). f) Set Mode to DHCP. g) Uncheck Use Cisco HDLC Slarp I/F h) Set SLARP Heatbeat Interval to 0.

Continued on next page

Page 81: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 79 November, 2007

CREATE CSU/ATM PARAMETERS, Continued

Set Initial Link Configuration Parameters (continued)

Step Action

5 Proceed as directed by the table below:

IF the backhaul type is … THEN …

Frame Relay – Voice a) Repeat steps 3-4 with Init Unit ID set to 2. b) Proceed with step 6 when step a is complete.

IPBH – Voice Continue with step 6

1xEV – PPP Continue with step 6

1xEV – HDLC a) Repeat steps 3-4 with Init Unit ID set to 2. b) Repeat steps 3-4 with Init Unit ID set to 3. c) Repeat steps 3-4 with Init Unit ID set to 4. d) Proceed with step 6 when steps a, b, and c

are complete.

6 Click on Apply from the Configure Boot Memory Parameters Screen.

7 Verify the “Backplane Successfully Updated” (text appears above the Apply Button).

8 Repeat all procedures in this Appendix for each equipped URC.

9 Go to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 70.

Page 82: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 80 November, 2007

DEFAULT T1/E1 SETTINGS

Default T1/E1 Optioning

The table below describes the default T1/E1 settings when recalling files bundled with RMT. The factory also uses the same default settings for T1 while all factory default E1 settings use CCS Signaling. The signaling for E1 must be CCS for all IP backhaul enabled cells.

Table 11: XML File T1/E1 TGM Settings

Continued on

n NOTE: CAS is not supported for E1 IPBH cells.

Field Name Default T1 Values Default E1 Values for CCS

Default E1 Values for CAS (see Note)

Daisy Chain Disabled Disabled Disabled

Mode T1 E1 E1

Line Coding B8ZS HDB3 HDB3

Framing Mode ESF NoCRC NoCRC

Signaling CCS/Clear Channel CCS/Clear Channel CAS/Channel Associated Signaling

Rate 64K 64K 64K

Long/Short Haul Long Long Long

Line Build Out / Equalization 0dB E1 LH E1 LH

Time Slot Mask 0x00ffffff 0xfffffffe 0xfffefffe

Page 83: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 81 November, 2007

RECORD VERSION UPGRADE

Record Version Upgrade Procedure

Follow the procedure below to upgrade or downgrade the Record Version information for a controller.

Step Action

1 Click Advanced at the bottom of the Configure Boot Memory Parameter window. The following window appears:

2 Change Record Version to 4

3 Click Apply in the “Advanced Serial Memory Record Parameters” window.

4 Click Yes in the “Are you Sure?” window.

Continued on next page

Page 84: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 82 November, 2007

RECORD VERSION UPGRADE, Continued

Record Version Upgrade Procedure (continued)

Step Action

5 Click Cancel to close the “Advanced Serial Memory Records Parameter” window.

6 Click Yes in the “Upgrade NFD Record” Window.

7 Determine the next procedure to execute. Do not exit the Configure Boot Memory Parameter window.

IF the CDM type is … THEN …

Voice return to Step 4 of Configure Voice Trunk Group Controller Parameters on page 49.

1xEV-DO return to Step 3 of Configure 1xEV-DO TGCP Parameters on page 61.

Page 85: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 83 November, 2007

BACKPLANE SERIAL NUMBER AND MAC ADDRESS

Backplane Serial Number

Use the following procedure to view the backplane serial number for cell. NOTE: The BPSN and MAC address are required information for cell using IP backhaul. This information will be populated in the btseqp form.

Step Action

1 Make an OFFLINE or ONLINE RMT connection to the cell’s first controller (URC).

2 Click Config Cell Boot Memory Parameters BPSN/MAC Addresses, from the RMT Connection Screen. The following Configure BPSN and MAC Address window appears:

Figure 14: BPSN and MAC Address

3 Repeat Steps 1 – 2 for each equipped controller. NOTES:

The BPSN must be identical for all equipped controllers and displayed regardless of which controller RMT is connected.

The MAC Address must be unique for each equipped controller. The MAC Address is only visible for the controller RMT is connected. You will need to connect to each equipped controller to view each unique MAC Address.

Page 86: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 84 November, 2007

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 87: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 85 November, 2007

UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTOR BACKPLANE PARAMETERS

RMT 29.0 Job Aid Section JA300

GENERAL INFORMATION

Purpose This section describes procedures for verifying and setting Unit Type Descriptor (UTD) backplane parameters. The Unit Type Descriptors are verified and set using RMT and are accessed via the RMT pull-down menu (as shown below).

In conjunction with the on-line RMT HELP menu, the following procedures will aid the user in verifying and setting these backplane parameters. The following procedures are provided in this section:

Section/Description

Section JA310 - Verifying and Setting the Unit Type Descriptor on page 87

Page 88: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 86 November, 2007

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 89: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 87 November, 2007

Unit Type Descriptor Backplane Parameters

Section JA310 - Verifying and Setting the Unit Type Descriptor

GENERAL

Section Description

This section describes procedures for verifying and setting the Unit Type Descriptor (UTD) for the following platforms:

• HD 4.0 • HD 4.0 Dual-Band • HD 4.0B Growth 1 • Base Station 8440-D/HD/M4 • Modcell 4.0/4.0B • Compact 4.0/4.0B • Base Station 2400 • Base Station 4400 • Base Station 8401 • Base Station 8420

The UTDs are verified and set using the Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT). It is assumed that the cell equipment has already been integrated and is in-service, meaning the backplane parameter programming was completed at the time of cell integration and commissioning. The procedures specified herein are to be performed if problems occur during the operation of the cell equipment or when updates need to be made to the existing UTD. The UTD parameters can be reviewed with the cell site either on-line or off-line via the RMT connection. It is highly recommended that whenever changes or updates are made to the backplane parameters that the cell is removed from service. Note: When creating or modifying .xml files always save a copy of the file to the appropriate directory folder on your computer.

Configuration Aid Document (CA 100)

The procedures outlined in this section are supported with the .xml files packaged in the Configuration Aid (CA 100) document. The CA 100 document is available through the Alcatel-Lucent Customer Information Center (CIC) – see CONFIGURATION AID (CA100) INSTALLATION on page 14 for information on accessing and loading this document. The CA 100 document includes:

• The various cell configurations, • Configuration overview, • Schematics, • Backplane programming information, • Applicable RF power calibration sections, and • Packaged XML files.

Page 90: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 88 November, 2007

FACILITIES DISCONNECTION

Facilities Disconnection

The connection between the switch and the cell should be removed prior to performing RMT standalone testing.

Step Action

1 Refer to the FACILITIES DISCONNECTION procedures on page 44 to remove the cell from service.

RMT INITIALIZATION

Connect with RMT

Use the following procedure to connect to the cell’s CDMA voice controller (URC) with RMT. Refer to the RMT Initialization and Startup procedures on page 17.

Step Action

1 Connect to the cell controller (URC) with RMT.

2 The updates described in this section can be performed while connected to the cell with RMT and using the Boot Generic. It is not necessary to boot to a call-processing generic to perform the procedures defined in this section.

3 Proceed as directed by the table below:

IF the cell is a … THEN … • HD 4.0 or, • HD 4.0 Dual-Band or, • HD 4.0B Growth 1 or, • Base Station 8440-

D/HD/M4 ….

Go to HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS on the next page.

• Modcell 4.0/4.0B • Compact 4.0/4.0B • Base Station 2400 • Base Station 4400 • Base Station 8401 • Base Station 8420

Go to the MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS on page 121.

Page 91: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 89 November, 2007

HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS

General The HD 4.0/4.0B and 8440 UTDs for this section include the following cell configurations:

• HD 4.0 • HD 4.0 Dual-Band • HD 4.0B Growth 1 • Base Station 8440-D • Base Station 8440-HD • Base Station 8440-M4

UTD Information The UTD is an XML file located on CDM EEPROM and:

• Set in the factory based on cabinet configuration and equipage. • The same for all equipped controllers in a cabinet (Voice and EVDO controllers must

have the same UTD file). • Modified at the site during field reconfigurations or upgrades.

Connect with RMT

Follow steps and procedures below : • To save existing UTD XML file • To update UTD by recalling a previously saved UTD XML file • To apply the UTD XML file to the modified cell site cabinet • To modify and/or create a UTD XML file

Step Action

1 Click on Config → Cell → Unit Type Descriptor and Set the desired URC number in field Select the URC you want to update.

3 Click Save under the Configuration file box.

4 Go to How to Save UTD XML File on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 92: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 90 November, 2007

HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS, Continued

How to Save UTD XML File

Follow procedure below to save an existing UTD XML file. Note: Always save the original UTD before making any change to the file.

Step Action

1 Click Save under the Configuration File box.

2 Click the down arrow and select the Local Disk(C :) drive.

3 Create a new folder by clicking the Create New Folder Icon

4 Type a name for the folder and press Enter. This folder can then be used to

store all of the UTD and Port Map xml files that are saved. For example you can name the folder “XML Files”.

5 Double Click the folder just created in Step 4.

6 Enter the desired filename in the File name box.

Example

Test Cell UTD.xml

7 Click Save in the “Save As” window.

8 After the file is saved a window appears “The operation completed successfully”. Click OK in this window.

9 Go to How to Recall and Apply UTD XML File on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 93: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 91 November, 2007

HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS, Continued

How to Recall and Apply UTD XML File

This procedure below provides instructions for recalling and applying XML files that have been previously saved to the laptop.

Step Action

1 Connect with RMT. NOTE: An ON-LINE connection may be used however any backplane changes made to the UTD will not take affect until the cell is rebooted (ie: stable-clear).

2 Open the “Configure Unit Type Descriptor” window (if it is not already open) from the RMT main menu select:

Config → Cell → Unit Type Descriptor

3 Set the desired URC number in the field Select the URC you want to update.

4 Click on Recall under the Configuration File heading.

5 Select and open the desired UTD XML file from the directory list. The .xml file can be recalled from the folder created for saving XML files or from the CA 100 folder. NOTE: Below is an example of a file directory.

6 Go to Apply the UTD to all URCs in the Frame on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 94: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 92 November, 2007

HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS, Continued

Apply the UTD to all URCs in the Frame

Use procedure below to apply the UTD XML file to all equipped URCs in the frame.

Step Action

1 Click Apply at the bottom of the Configure Unit Type Descriptor window.

2 The Synchronized EEPROM Write window appears. Verify that all equipped URCs including the spare (URC 4) have a check mark.

3 Click Confirm. RMT will update all the selected URCs.

4 Click Cancel in the Configure Unit Type Descriptor window.

5 Go to Test Cleanup / Final Procedures on page 158.

Page 95: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 93 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE

Overview of How to Manually Edit or Create a Unit Type Descriptor

Below is an overview of procedures of how to manually edit or create a Unit type Descriptor XML file. This procedure can be used by an experienced installer to edit or create the UTD XML file.

Stage Description

1 To access the UTD screen, select: Config → Cell → Unit Type Descriptor

2 Set the desired URC number in field Select the URC you want to update.

3 Save the existing UTD configuration file. See How to Save UTD XML File on page 90.

4 Delete any existing entries by pressing the “Delete this entry” button and Click Yes in the Confirm delete window.

5 Repeat Step 4 until ALL entries are deleted. Confirm that the Total number of units described is 0.

6 Click on Add New Entry under Append New Entry

7 Create new entries based on the HD 4.0/4.0B or the Base Station 8440 configuration you have. See How to Manually Create the UTD XML file entries on the next page.

8 Upon completing all entries, click Apply.

9 Save the new UTD configuration file to laptop. See How to Save UTD XML File on page 90.

10 Click Cancel to exit the Configure Unit Type Descriptor Window.

Continued on next page

Page 96: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 94 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued

How to Manually Create the UTD XML file

Follow the procedure below to configure the unit type descriptor. NOTE: Use this procedures below if the UTD XML file is not able to be recalled.

Step Action

1 Connect with RMT. Make an OFF-LINE connection to the cell with RMT.

2 From the RMT main menu, open the Configure Unit Type Descriptor screen by selecting Config → Cell → Unit Type Descriptor

Figure 15: Unit Type Descriptor Screen (example)

3 Delete any existing entries by pressing the “Delete this entry” button and Click Yes in the Confirm delete window.

4 Repeat Step 3 until ALL entries are deleted. Confirm that the Total number of units described is 0.

5 Proceed to the appropriate procedure.

IF updating UTD for a ... THEN ...

primary frame with no OMs Go to Reference Frequency Source Entry on page 95.

PCS only growth frame Go to Transmit Amplifier Entries for Flexent Amps on page 106.

HD Frame using LAC or using a BS 8440A without filters

Go to Transmit Amplifier Entries for LAC or BS 8440A Without Filters on page 100.

A Base Station using a BS 8440 with filters

Go to UTD Entry for BS 8440 Configs on page 117.

Continued on next page

Page 97: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 95 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued Reference Frequency Source Entry

Follow the procedure below to add the Phantom OM entry to the unit type descriptor. NOTE: Do not use this procedure if OM is equipped in HD frame.

• Go to Transmit Amplifier Entries for LAC or BS 8440A Without Filters on page 100 or • Go to Transmit Amplifier Entries for Flexent Amps on page 106 or • Go to UTD Entry for BS 8440 Configs on 117 to add UTD for BS 8440-D,

BS 8440-HD, or BS 8440-M4.

Step Action

1 Click Add Entry. In the new entry box that appears do the following.

2 Select Reference Frequency Source for the Unit Type line.

Figure 16: Unit Type Field Selecting Reference Frequency Source

Continued on next page

Page 98: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 96 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued Reference Frequency Source Entry (continued)

Step Action

3 Select Logical Unit Number in the center box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line.

Figure 17: Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Field Selecting Logical Unit Number

Continued on next page

Page 99: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 97 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued

Reference Frequency Source Entry (continued)

Step Action

4 Enter 1 in the last box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line.

Figure 18: Last Box of Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Line

Continued on next page

Page 100: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 98 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued Reference Frequency Source Entry (continued)

Step Action

5 Enter 0x0 in the Additional Information line.

Figure 19: Additional Information Field

Continued on next page

Page 101: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 99 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued

Reference Frequency Source Entry (continued)

Step Action

6 Select Phantom OM for the Unit Type Descriptor line

Figure 20: Unit Type Descriptor Field Selecting an Phantom OM

7 Proceed to Transmit Amplifier Entries for LAC or BS 8440A Without Filters on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 102: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 100 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued Transmit Amplifier Entries for LAC or BS 8440A Without Filters

Follow the procedure below to add the transmit amplifier for a LAC or BS 8440A (MCPA) without filters (Series-II AIF is being used) to the unit type descriptor (UTD). NOTE: If the transmit path is using filters located in the BS 8440A do NOT use this part of the procedure.

Step Action

1 Click Add Entry. In the new entry box that appears do the following.

2 Select Transmit Amplifier for the Unit Type line.

Figure 21: Unit Type Field Selecting Transmit Amplifier

Continued on next page

Page 103: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 101 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued Transmit Amplifier Entries for LAC or BS 8440A Without Filters (continued)

Step Action

3 Select Logical Unit Number in the center box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line.

Figure 22: Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Field Selecting Logical Unit Number

Continued on next page

Page 104: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 102 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued Transmit Amplifier Entries for LAC or BS 8440A Without Filters (continued)

Step Action

4 Determine entry in the last box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line from below.

IF ... THEN ...

primary HD enter 10 NOTE: The number will be incremented for each amplifier entry (11, 12, 13, 14, 15, and 16).

primary with Flexent transmit amps installed in frame

enter 30 NOTE: The number will be incremented for each amplifier entry (31, 32, 33, 34, 35, and 36).

growth frame with 850 radios

enter 30 NOTE: The number will be incremented for each amplifier entry (31, 32, 33, 34, 35, and 36).

Figure 23: Last Box of Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Line Showing Incremented Number

Continued on next page

Page 105: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 103 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued Transmit Amplifier Entries for LAC or BS 8440A Without Filters (continued)

Step Action

5 Determine entry in the Additional Information line from below.

IF ... THEN enter...

Primary HD 0xA

all others 0x1E

Figure 24: Additional Information Field

Continued on next page

Page 106: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 104 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued Transmit Amplifier Entries for LAC or BS 8440A Without Filters (continued)

Step Action

6 Determine entry for the Unit Type Descriptor line from below.

IF LAC/BS 8440A (MCPA) ... THEN select ...

Supports RS-485 Modcell/OneBTS, RS-422,RC/V,sc

Does not support RS-485 Null AMP (software stub)

Figure 25: Unit Type Descriptor Field Selecting an Amplifier Type

Continued on next page

Page 107: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 105 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued Transmit Amplifier Entries for LAC or BS 8440A Without Filters (continued)

Step Action

7 Repeat six times steps from 1 to 6 to add all the seven LAC entries.

8 Check if BS 8440A (MCPA) equipped.

IF ... THEN ...

Yes Go to step 9

No Go to step 10

9 Steps from 1 to 6 to be repeated again seven more times to add all MCPA entries with the new Logical unit numbers starts from 20. NOTE: Steps 4, 5 and 6 have different entries outlined in the table below:

On Step 1 Click Add Entry.

On Step 2 Select Transmit Amplifier for the Unit Type line.

On Step 3 Select Logical Unit Number in the center box.

On Step 4 NOTE: The number entered in this box will be incremented for each filter entry (20, 21, 22, 23, 25, 26 and 27).

On Step 5 NOTE: In the Additional Information Line enter 0x14.

On Step 6 NOTE: For the Unit Type Descriptor select Null Amp (software stub).

Go to step 10.

10 Proceed to the appropriate procedure.

IF the frame ... THEN go to ...

is equipped with Flexent amps Transmit Amplifier Entries for Flexent Amps on page 106.

is not equipped with Flexent amps Proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 158.

Continued on next page

Page 108: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 106 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued Transmit Amplifier Entries for Flexent Amps

Follow the procedure below to add the Flexent transmit amplifiers located in the HD 4.0/4.0B Frame to the unit type descriptor.

Step Action

1 Click Add Entry. In the new entry box that appears do the following.

2 Select Transmit Amplifier for the Unit Type line.

Figure 26: Unit Type Field Selecting Transmit Amplifier

Continued on next page

Page 109: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 107 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued Transmit Amplifier Entries for Flexent Amps (continued)

Step Action

3 Select Number of Units in the center box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line.

Figure 27: Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Field Selecting Logical Unit Number

Continued on next page

Page 110: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 108 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued

Transmit Amplifier Entries for Flexent Amps (continued)

Step Action

4 Enter 18 in the last box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line.

Figure 28: Last Box of Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Line

Continued on next page

Page 111: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 109 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued Transmit Amplifier Entries for Flexent Amps (continued)

Step Action

5 Enter 0x0 in the Additional Information line.

Figure 29: Additional Information Field

Continued on next page

Page 112: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 110 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued Transmit Amplifier Entries for Flexent Amps (continued)

Step Action

6 Select Modcell OneBTS I2C, RC/V, kc1, kc2, kc3, kp1, kp2, kp3, clam, plam for the Unit Type Descriptor line

Figure 30: Unit Type Descriptor Field Selecting an Amplifier Type

7 Proceed to Filter Panel Entries for Flexent Filters on page 111.

Continued on next page

Page 113: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 111 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued Filter Panel Entries for Flexent Filters

Follow the procedure below to add the Flexent filter panels located in the frame to the unit type descriptor.

Step Action

1 Click Add Entry. In the new entry box that appears do the following.

2 Select Filter Panel for the Unit Type line.

Figure 31: Unit Type Field Selecting Filter Panel

Continued on next page

Page 114: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 112 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued Filter Panel Entries for Flexent Filters (continued)

Step Action

3 Determine entry in the center box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line from below.

IF the Flexent amps in the frame are connected to ...

THEN select ...

filters in a primary frame Number of Units

filters in a growth frame Logical Unit Number

Figure 32: Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Field Selecting Logical Unit Number

Continued on next page

Page 115: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 113 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued Filter Panel Entries for Flexent Filters (continued)

Step Action

4 Determine entry in the last box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line from below.

IF the Flexent amps in the frame are connected to ...

THEN enter ...

filters in the primary frame

6

filters in the growth frame

1 NOTE: The number entered in this box will be incremented for each filter entry. (2, 3, 4, 5, and 6)

Figure 33: Last Box of Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Line

Continued on next page

Page 116: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 114 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued Filter Panel Entries for Flexent Filters (continued)

Step Action

5 Determine entry in the Additional Information line from below.

IF the Flexent amps in the frame are connected to ...

THEN ...

filters in the primary frame enter 0x0

filters in the growth frame i) Click Filter Panel Location

Figure 34: Filter Panel Location Screen ii) Select 2 for the Digital Shelf. iii) Select 1 for the Filter Shelf. iv) Select 1 for the Filter Number.

NOTE: The number entered in this box will be incremented for each filter entry. (2,3,4,5, and 6)

v) Click OK in the Filter Panel Location Window

Continued on next page

Page 117: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 115 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued Filter Panel Entries for Flexent Filters (continued)

Step Action

6 Determine entry for the Unit Type Descriptor line from below.

IF ... THEN select ...

Modcell 3.0 filters Modcell hybrid I2C/Ibutton interface

Dual Duplex filters Dual OneBTS Filter Panel

Figure 35: Unit Type Descriptor Field Selecting an Amplifier Type

Continued on next page

Page 118: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 116 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued Filter Panel Entries for Flexent Filters (continued)

Step Action

7 Determine if steps need to be repeated.

IF the ... THEN ...

filters are in the growth frame Repeat step 1-6 to add in the six filters

filters not a growth frame go to step 8

8 Proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 158.

Continued on next page

Page 119: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 117 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued

UTD Entry for BS 8440 Configs

Follow the procedure below to add TxAmpShelf to the unit type descriptor for BS 8440D, BS 8440-HD, or BS 8440-M4.

Step Action

1 Click Add Entry. In the new entry box that appears do the following.

2 Select TxAmpShelf for the Unit Type line.

Figure 36: Unit Type Field Selecting TxAmpShelf

Continued on next page

Page 120: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 118 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued UTD Entry for BS 8440 Configs (continued)

Step Action

4 Select Number of Units on the line below TxAmpShelf.

Figure 37: Selecting Number of Units

Continued on next page

Page 121: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 119 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued UTD Entry for BS 8440 Configs (continued)

Step Action

5 Select 3 for the number of units.

Figure 38: Entering “3” for the Number of Units

6 Enter 0x0 for Additional Information.

Continued on next page

Page 122: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 120 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE HD 4.0/4.0B AND 8440 UTD XML FILE, Continued

UTD Entry for BS 8440 Configs (continued)

Step Action

7 Select TxAmpShelf, Ethernet Interface for the Unit Type Descriptor line.

Figure 39: Selecting Unit Type Descriptor

8 Proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 158.

Page 123: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 121 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS

General The Modcell 4.0/4.0B UTDs for this section include the following cell configurations:

• Modcell 4.0/4.0B • Compact 4.0/4.0B • Base Station 2400 • Base Station 4400 • Base Station 8401 • Base Station 8420

UTD Information The UTD is an XML file located on CDM EEPROM and: • Set in the factory based on cabinet configuration and equipage. • The same for all equipped controllers in a cabinet (Voice and EVDO controllers must

have the same UTD file). • Modified at the site during field reconfigurations or upgrades.

Connect with RMT

Follow steps and procedures below : • To save existing UTD XML file • To update UTD by recalling a previously saved UTD XML file • To apply the UTD XML file to the modified cell site cabinet • To modify and/or create a UTD XML file

Step Action

1 Click on Config → Cell → Unit Type Descriptor and Set the desired URC number in field Select the URC you want to update.

3 Click Save under the Configuration file box.

4 Go to How to Save UTD XML File on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 124: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 122 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS, Continued

How to Save UTD XML File

Follow procedure below to save an existing UTD XML file. Note: Always save the original UTD before making any change to the file.

Step Action

1 Click Save under the Configuration File box.

2 Click the down arrow and select the Local Disk(C :) drive.

3 Create a new folder by clicking the Create New Folder Icon

4 Type a name for the folder and press Enter. This folder can then be used to

store all of the UTD and Port Map xml files that are saved. For example you can name the folder “XML Files”.

5 Double Click the folder just created in Step 4.

6 Enter the desired filename in the File name box.

Example

Test Cell UTD.xml

7 Click Save in the “Save As” window.

8 After the file is saved a window appears “The operation completed successfully”. Click OK in this window.

9 Go to How to Recall and Apply UTD XML File on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 125: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 123 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS, Continued

How to Recall and Apply UTD XML File

This procedure below provides instructions for recalling and applying XML files that have been previously saved to the laptop.

Step Action

1 Connect with RMT. NOTE: An ON-LINE connection may be used however any backplane changes made to the UTD will not take affect until the cell is rebooted (ie: stable-clear).

2 Open the “Configure Unit Type Descriptor” window (if it is not already open) from the RMT main menu select:

Config → Cell → Unit Type Descriptor

3 Set the desired URC number in the field Select the URC you want to update.

4 Click on Recall under the Configuration File heading.

5 Select and open the desired UTD XML file from the directory list. The .xml file can be recalled from the folder created for saving XML files or from the CA 100 folder. NOTE: Below is an example of a file directory.

6 Go to Apply the UTD to all URCs in the Frame on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 126: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 124 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UNIT TYPE DESCRIPTORS, Continued

Apply the UTD to all URCs in the Frame

Use procedure below to apply the UTD XML file to all equipped URCs in the frame.

Step Action

1 Click Apply at the bottom of the Configure Unit Type Descriptor window.

2 The Synchronized EEPROM Write window appears. Verify that all equipped URCs including the spare (URC 4) have a check mark.

3 Click Confirm. RMT will update all the selected URCs.

4 Click Cancel in the Configure Unit Type Descriptor window.

5 Proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 158.

Page 127: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 125 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE

General The following procedures describe how to edit and create the Modcell UTD. These UTDs

include the following cell configurations:

• Modcell 4.0/4.0B • Compact 4.0/4.0B • Base Station 2400 • Base Station 4400 • Base Station 8401 • Base Station 8420

Amplifier Entry Follow the procedure below to add the amplifier entry to the unit type descriptor.

Step Action

1 Connect with RMT. Make an OFF-LINE connection to the cell with RMT. NOTE: An ON-LINE connection may be used, however, any backplane changes will not take affect until the cell/controller is re-booted. On-line connections are generally used to monitor cell status and to perform on-line RF power calibration.

2 From the RMT main menu, open the Configure Unit Type Descriptor screen by selecting Config → Cell → Unit Type Descriptor

Figure 40: Selecting UTD

Continued on next page

Page 128: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 126 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Amplifier Entry (continued)

Step Action

3 From the RMT main menu, open the Configure Unit Type Descriptor screen by selecting Config → Cell → Unit Type Descriptor

Figure 41: Unit Type Descriptor Screen (example)

4 Click Add Entry. In the new entry box that appears do the following.

Continued on next page

Page 129: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 127 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Amplifier Entry (continued)

Step Action

5 Select Transmit Amplifier for the Unit Type line.

Figure 42: Unit Type Field Selecting Transmit Amplifier

Continued on next page

Page 130: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 128 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued Amplifier Entry (continued)

Step Action

6 Select Number of Units in the center box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line.

Figure 43: Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Field Selecting Number of Units

Continued on next page

Page 131: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 129 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Amplifier Entry (continued)

Step Action

7 Enter 18 in the last box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line.

Figure 44: Number of Amplifier Units

Continued on next page

Page 132: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 130 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Amplifier Entry (continued)

Step Action

8 Enter 0x0 in the Additional Information line.

Figure 45: Additional Information Field

Continued on next page

Page 133: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 131 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Amplifier Entry (continued)

Step Action

9 For the Unit Type Descriptor line

IF the cell is… THEN select…

equipped with amplifiers Modcell OneBTS I2C, RC/V, kc1, kc2, kc3, kp1, kp2, kp3, clam, plam

not equipped with amplifiers Null AMP (software stub)

Figure 46: Unit Type Descriptor Field Selecting an Amplifier Type

Continued on next page

Page 134: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 132 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Amplifier Entry (continued)

Step Action

10 Proceed to the appropriate procedure to enter filters in the UTD

IF the frame is... THEN go to...

a primary frame equipped with filters Filter Entry for a Primary Frame on page 133.

a single band class growth frame Filter Entry for a Single Band Class Growth Frame on page 138.

a multi-bandclass growth frame Filter Entry for a Multi Band Class Growth Frame on page 143.

a Base Station 8420 with no filters Proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 158.

Page 135: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 133 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Filter Entry for a Primary Frame

Follow the procedure below to add the filter entry to the unit type descriptor.

Step Action

1 Click Add Entry. In the new Entry box that appears do the following.

2 Select Filter Panel in the Unit Type line.

Figure 47: Unit Type Field Selecting Filter Panel

Continued on next page

Page 136: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 134 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Filter Entry for a Primary Frame (continued)

Step Action

3 Select Number of Units in the center box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line.

Figure 48: Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Field Selecting Number Of Units

Continued on next page

Page 137: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 135 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Filter Entry for a Primary Frame (continued)

Step Action

4 For the last box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line.

IF the frame is ... THEN enter...

Modcell 4.0B Six Sector 12

Base Station 8420 with filters 12

Base Station 8401 12

Compact 4.0 Omni 2

Compact 4.0 IBS 2

all other frames 6

Figure 49: Number of Filter Units

Continued on next page

Page 138: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 136 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Filter Entry for a Primary Frame (continued)

Step Action

5 Enter 0x0 For in the Additional Information line.

Figure 50: Additional Information Line Entering 0X0

Continued on next page

Page 139: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 137 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Filter Entry for a Primary Frame (continued)

Step Action

6 For the Unit Type Descriptor line

IF the frame has… THEN select…

Modcell 3.0 filters Modcell hybrid I2C/Ibutton interface

Dual Duplex filters Dual OneBTS Filter Panel

Figure 51: Unit Type Descriptor Selecting a Filter Panel Type

7 Proceed to the appropriate procedure.

IF the frame is... THEN go to...

a Compact 4.0 RU/BU configuration Radio Entries for Compact 4.0 RU/BU configurations on page 153.

any other primary configuration Proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 158.

Page 140: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 138 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Filter Entry for a Single Band Class Growth Frame

Follow the procedure below to add the filter entry to the unit type descriptor.

Step Action

1 Click Add Entry. In the new Entry box that appears do the following.

2 Select Filter Panel for the Unit Type line.

Figure 52: Unit Type Field Selecting Filter Panel

Continued on next page

Page 141: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 139 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Filter Entry for a Single Band Class Growth Frame (continued)

Step Action

3 Select Logical Unit Number in the center box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line.

Figure 53: Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Field Selecting Logical Unit Number

Continued on next page

Page 142: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 140 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Filter Entry for a Single Band Class Growth Frame (continued)

Step Action

4 Enter 1 for the last box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line. NOTE: The number entered in this box will be incremented for each filter entry. (2,3,4,5, and 6)

Figure 54: Last box in Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Inserting an incremented number

Continued on next page

Page 143: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 141 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Filter Entry for a Single Band Class Growth Frame (continued)

Step Action

5 For the Additional Information line.

IF the frame is... THEN ...

equipped with filters or simulators

i) Click Filter Panel Location

Figure 55: Filter Panel Location Screen

ii) For the Digital Shelf:

IF the frame is...

THEN select...

Growth 1 2

Growth 2 3

Growth 3 4

iii) For the Filter Shelf select 1. iv) For the Filter Number select 1.

NOTE: The number entered in this box will be incremented for each filter entry. (2,3,4,5, and 6)

v) Click OK in the Filter Panel Location Window vi) Go to step 6

not equipped with filters or simulators

i) Enter 0x1 NOTE: The number entered in this box will be incremented for each filter entry. (0x2, 0x3, 0x4, 0x5, and 0x6)

ii) Go to step 6

Continued on next page

Page 144: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 142 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Filter Entry for a Single Band Class Growth Frame (continued)

Step Action

6 For the Unit Type Descriptor line

IF the growth frame has… THEN select…

Modcell 3.0 filters or simulators Modcell hybrid I2C/Ibutton interface

Dual Duplex filters Dual OneBTS Filter Panel

no filters or a CLGC hub Null Filter Panel

a CLGC hub and the Primary frame has Dual Duplex filters

Dual OneBTS Filter Panel

a CLGC hub and the Primary frame has Modcell 3.0 filters

Modcell hybrid I2C/Ibutton interface

Figure 56: Unit Type Descriptor Field Selecting Filter Panel Type

7 Repeat steps 1-6 to insert 6 filter panel entries

8 Proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 158.

Page 145: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 143 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Filter Entry for a Multi Band Class Growth Frame

Follow the procedure below to add the filter entry to the unit type descriptor.

Step Action

1 Click Add Entry. In the new Entry box that appears do the following.

2 Select Filter Panel for the Unit Type line.

Figure 57: Unit Type Field Selecting Filter Panel

Continued on next page

Page 146: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 144 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Filter Entry for a Multi Band Class Growth Frame (continued)

Step Action

3 Select Logical Unit Number in the center box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line.

Figure 58: Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Field Selecting Logical Unit Number

Continued on next page

Page 147: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 145 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Filter Entry for a Multi Band Class Growth Frame (continued)

Step Action

4 Enter 1 in the last box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line. NOTE: The number entered in this box will be incremented for each filter entry. (2,3,4,5, and 6)

Figure 59: Last box in Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Inserting an incremented number

Continued on next page

Page 148: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 146 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Filter Entry for a Multi Band Class Growth Frame (continued)

Step Action

5 Enter 0x1on the Additional Information line. NOTE: The number entered in this box will be incremented for each filter entry. (0x2, 0x3, 0x4, 0x5, and 0x6)

Figure 60: Additional Information Field

Continued on next page

Page 149: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 147 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Filter Entry for a Multi Band Class Growth Frame (continued)

Step Action

6 Select Null Filter Panel on the Unit Type Descriptor line.

Figure 61: Unit Type Descriptor Field Selecting Null Filter Panel

7 Repeat steps 1-6 adding in filter panel logical unit entries 1-6

Continued on next page

Page 150: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 148 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Filter Entry for a Multi Band Class Growth Frame (continued)

Step Action

8 Click Add Entry. In the new Entry box that appears do the following.

9 Select Filter Panel for the Unit Type line.

Figure 62: Unit Type Field Selecting Filter Panel

Continued on next page

Page 151: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 149 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Filter Entry for a Multi Band Class Growth Frame (continued)

Step Action

10 Select Logical Unit Number in the center box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line.

Figure 63: Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Field Selecting Logical Unit Number

Continued on next page

Page 152: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 150 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Filter Entry for a Multi Band Class Growth Frame (continued)

Step Action

11 Enter 7 inFor the last box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line. NOTE: The number entered in this box will be incremented for each filter entry. (8, 9, 10, 11, and 12)

Figure 64: Last box in Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Inserting an incremented number

Continued on next page

Page 153: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 151 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Filter Entry for a Multi Band Class Growth Frame (continued)

Step Action

12 Click Filter Panel Location

Figure 65: Filter Panel Location Window

13 Select the Digital Shelf number based on the table below:

IF the frame is... THEN select...

Growth 1 2

Growth 2 3

Growth 3 4

Continued on next page

Page 154: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 152 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Filter Entry for a Multi Band Class Growth Frame (continued)

Step Action

14 Select 1 for the Filter Shelf in the Filter Panel Location window.

15 Select 1 for the Filter Number in the Filter Panel Location window. NOTE: The number entered in this box will be incremented for each filter entry. (2,3,4,5, and 6)

16 Click OK in the Filter Panel Location Window

17 Select Modcell hybrid I2C/Ibutton interface for the Unit Type Descriptor line.

Figure 66: Unit Type Descriptor Selecting Amp Type Modcell hybrid I2C/Ibutton interface

18 Repeat steps 8-17 adding in filter panel logical unit entries 7-12.

19 Proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 158.

Page 155: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 153 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Radio Entries for Compact 4.0 RU/BU configurations

Follow the procedure below to add radio entries to the unit type descriptor. NOTE: Only used for Compact 4.0 cells with remote sectors.

Step Action

1 Click Add Entry. In the new Entry box that appears do the following.

2 Select Radio on the Unit Type line.

Figure 67: Unit Type Field Selecting Radio

Continued on next page

Page 156: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 154 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Radio Entries for Compact 4.0 RU/BU configurations (continued)

Step Action

3 Select Logical Unit Number in the center box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line.

Figure 68: Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Field Selecting Logical Unit Number

Continued on next page

Page 157: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 155 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Radio Entries for Compact 4.0 RU/BU configurations (continued)

Step Action

4 Enter 1 in the last box of the Logical Unit Number/Number of Units line. NOTE: The number entered in this box will be incremented for each radio entry. (2, and 3)

Figure 69: Last box in Logical Unit Number/Number of Units Inserting an incremented number

Continued on next page

Page 158: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 156 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Radio Entries for Compact 4.0 RU/BU configurations (continued)

Step Action

5 Enter 0x0 in the Additional Information line.

Figure 70: Additional Information Line Entering 0X0

Continued on next page

Page 159: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 157 November, 2007

MANUALLY EDIT/CREATE THE MODCELL 4.0/4.0B UTD XML FILE, Continued

Radio Entries for Compact 4.0 RU/BU configurations (continued)

Step Action

6 For the Unit Type Descriptor line

IF the radio slot has a … THEN select…

radio Generic OneBTS/Modcell 4.0 multicarrier

CFM (Common Fiber Module) OneBTS CFMA Radio – for Remote RFU)

Figure 71: Unit Type Descriptor Field Selecting Radio Type

7 Repeat steps 1-6 adding radio logical unit entries 1-3.

8 Proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 158.

Page 160: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 158 November, 2007

FINAL PROCEDURES

Test Cleanup / Final Procedures

Follow the procedure below to complete the RMT testing procedure.

Step Action

1 Click DISCONNECT on the RMT screen.

2 Click File → Exit.

3 Remove all test equipment connections from the cell.

4 Reconnect the T1/E1.

5 Power cycle the digital shelf:

IF … THEN … ELSE …

Trying to Maintain GPS Lock

Reseat all the equipped URCs. CAUTION: Unscrew URCs

Reset the Digital Shelf Circuit Breaker as shown in the example below.

IOU

Digital Shelf Circuit Breaker

Digital Shelf Power

Filter ShelfFan Tray

ON

O |ON

Fan Tray PowerO |

6 Secure the cabinet door.

Page 161: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 159 November, 2007

BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP BACKPLANE PARAMETERS

RMT 29.0 Job Aid Section JA400

GENERAL INFORMATION

Purpose This section describes procedures for verifying and setting BTS Primary RF Path Map backplane parameters. The BTS Primary RF Path Maps are verified and set using RMT and are accessed via the RMT pull-down menu (as shown below):

In conjunction with the on-line RMT HELP menu, the following procedures will aid the user in verifying and setting these backplane parameters. The following procedures are provided in this section:

Section/Description

Section JA410 - Verifying and Setting BTS Primary RF Path Map on page 161

Page 162: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 160 November, 2007

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 163: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 161 November, 2007

BTS Primary RF Path Map Backplane Parameters

Section JA410 - Verifying and Setting BTS Primary RF Path Map

GENERAL

Section Description

This section describes procedures for verifying and setting the BTS Primary RF Path Map backplane parameters for the following platforms:

• HD 4.0 • HD 4.0 Dual-Band • HD 4.0B Growth 1 • Base Station 8440-D • Base Station 8440-HD • Base Station 8440-M4 • Modcell 4.0/4.0B • Compact 4.0/4.0B • Base Station 2400 • Base Station 4400 • Base Station 8401 • Base Station 8420 • 850MHz Compact RU/BU • 450MHz Standard Compact • 450MHz Compact RU/BU

The BTS Primary RF Path Map is verified and set using the Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT). It is assumed that the cell equipment has already been integrated and is in-service, meaning the RF Path Map was properly configured at the time of integration. The procedures specified herein are to be performed if problems occur during the operation of the cell equipment or when updates need to be made to the existing RF Path Map. The BTS Primary RF Path Map parameters can be reviewed either on-line or off-line via the RMT connection. It is highly recommended that whenever changes or updates are made to the backplane parameters that the cell is removed from service. Note: When creating or modifying .xml files always save a copy of the file to the appropriate directory folder on your computer.

MCR vs. UCR The instructions in this section apply to both UCRs (5MHz radio) and MCRs (15 MHz radio). The term “Radio” used throughout this section refers to both UCR and MCR.

Page 164: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 162 November, 2007

FACILITIES DISCONNECTION

Facilities Disconnection

The connection between the switch and the cell must be removed prior to performing RMT standalone testing.

Step Action

1 Refer to the FACILITIES DISCONNECTION procedures on page 44 to remove the cell from service.

RMT INITIALIZATION

Connect with RMT

Use the following procedure to connect to the cell’s CDMA voice controller (URC) with RMT. Refer to the RMT Initialization and Startup procedures on page 17.

Step Action

1 Connect to the cell controller (URC) with RMT.

2 The updates described in this section can be performed while connected to the cell with RMT and using the Boot Generic. It is not necessary to boot to a call-processing generic to perform the procedures defined in this section.

3 Proceed as directed by the table below:

IF the cell is a … THEN … • HD 4.0 or, • HD 4.0 Dual-Band or, • HD 4.0B Growth 1 ….

Go to HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION on the next page.

• Base Station 8440-D or, Base Station 8440-HD or,

• Base Station 8440—M4….

Go to 8440 BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION on page 189.

• Modcell 4.0/4.0B • Compact 4.0/4.0B • Base Station 2400 • Base Station 4400 • Base Station 8401 • Base Station 8420

Go to MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION on page 209.

Page 165: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 163 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION

Section Description

This section describes the procedures to verify and update the BTS Primary RF Path Map on the following products:

High Density (HD) 4.0 or High Density (HD) 4.0B connected to: o S2 LAF frame o Pre-R29 BS 8440-A frame (MCPA) (without filters)

Pre-R29 8440-A (without filters) configurations are defined as configurations where the S2 LAF frame has been replaced with an 8440-A frame but the digital shelf has not been reconfigured to support the R29 interface between the digital shelf and the 8440-A frame.

o Pre-R29 BS 8440-A frame (MCPA) (with filters) Pre-R29 8440-A (with filters) configurations are defined as

configurations where the S2 LAF and AIF frames have been replaced with an 8440-A frame with filters but the digital shelf has not been reconfigured to support the R29 interface between the digital shelf and the 8440-A frame.

Pre-R29 Cell Generic Note: Pre-R29 configurations can operate on R29 and later cell generics but are not considered “R29 8440 configurations” until the lineup has been reconfigured to support the R29 interface between the digital shelf and the 8440-A frame.

Updating the BTS Primary RF Path Map requires the use of the Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT). The procedures specified herein are to be performed if:

Updates are needed to the existing backplane parameters (i.e. during carrier growth, or pre R29 8440-A installation, or radio growth scenarios);

Problems occur during the integration process of the cell equipment.

Do Not Use This Section for R29 8440 Configurations

This section cannot be used to update the BTS Primary RF Path Map on R29 8440 configurations. Go to 8440 BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION on page 189 to program the BTS Primary RF Path Map for these configurations:

R29 8440 Configurations are defined as lineups that support the R29 interface between the digital shelf and the 8440-A frame.

R29 8440 Configurations include the following lineups: o 8440-D o 8440-HD o 8440-M4

When to Update the BTS Primary RF Path Map

BTS Primary RF Path Maps are set in the factory based on the cabinet configuration and equipage. If problems are experienced during the integration efforts related to the BTS RF Primary Path Map and/or when field changes are made to the cabinet, use the following procedures to update the path map information. This section gives instructions for populating each field of the BTS Primary RF Path Map.

Configuration Aid Document (CA 100)

The procedures outlined in this section are supported with the .xml files packaged in the Configuration Aid (CA 100) document. The CA 100 document is available through the Alcatel-Lucent Customer Information Center (CIC) – see CONFIGURATION AID (CA100) INSTALLATION on page 14 for information on accessing and loading this document. The CA 100 document includes:

The various cell configurations, Applicable RF power calibration sections, and Packaged XML files.

Continued on next page

Page 166: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 164 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Test Equipment Information

The following provides test equipment information that pertains to the HD 4.0/4.0B configurations.

TDU Numbering

Currently a frame with UCRs (5 MHz Radio) can be equipped with the TDU 1 and TDU 2. TDU 1 is used for antenna tests while TDU 2 is used for Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC). RMT does not reference TDU in the same manner as ECP Database translations. See the table below. This Handbook section follows the RMT convention and refers to the TDU in a frame as TDU 1 or TDU 2.

Frame RMT Reference Database Translation Reference Function

1 1 Antenna Test Primary

2 2 CLGC

Growth #1 Not Applicable. TDU is not support in an HD Growth 1 frame.

TDU Connections TDU 1 connects to the J2 & J3 ports for Duplex and Triplex filters. TDU 2 connects to the external coupler on the J8 or J9 port of the Duplex and Triplex filters.

MCR Connections

For the HD RF paths, the MCR connects to a Dual Duplex Filter (MCRs transmitting through a Modcell 3.0 Filter is not supported). The MCR supports both Antenna Test and Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC). The following ports on the MCR are used for these functions:

MCR Port Dual Duplex Filter Connection Function

RC1 J11 CLGC

(for Tx1 port)

RC2 J31 CLGC

(for Tx2 port)

TONE J41 Antenna Test NOTE: The MCR can also connect to the HD Combiner Attenuator Unit (CAU). In this case, the MCR is transmitting through the SII LAC or pre-R29 BS 8440A (MCPA). CLGC is not supported for MCRs connected to a CAU and Antenna Tests are executed by the SII RTU (if equipped).

Continued on next page

Page 167: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 165 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Save Original BTS Primary RF Path Map

Follow this procedure to save the original BTS Primary RF Path Map. NOTE: Always save the original factory BTS Primary RF Path Map because it may contain calibration data or for “back out” procedures.

Step Action

1 Click Config → RF Calibration → BTS Primary RF Path Map, from the RMT main screen. A window appears as shown below.

Figure 72: BTS Primary RF Path Map (example)

2 Select Common Data from the “Version” box at the top of the window.

Continued on next page

Page 168: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 166 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Save Original BTS Primary RF Path Map (continued)

Step Action

3 Select the URC.

IF saving Path Map for … THEN set “Select the URC you want to update” to …

URC1 1

URC2 2

URC3 3

4 Click Save in the Configuration File Box to save a copy of the current Primary RF Path Map. NOTE: After clicking Save, type the filename as shown below and save it to a directory as desired. Refer to SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE on page 242 for procedures to create a directory to store files. Cell x Original Radio Path Map where x = Cell Number

Continued on next page

Page 169: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 167 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Verify Port Map Version

Follow this procedure to verify the Port Map Version is set to 1. NOTE: The Port Map Version for all URCs must be set to 1.

Step Action

1 Determine the current Port Map Version. NOTE: The Port Map Version is located on the top right of the BTS Primary RF Path Map screen. See Figure 72 on page 165.

2 Update the Port Map Version as needed.

IF the Port Map Version is …

THEN …

0

Proceed to CHANGING PORT MAP VERSIONS on page 247 to change the Port Map Version to 1.

Proceed to Step 3.

1 Proceed to Step 3.

3 Proceed to Filter Panel Numbering (Tx) on next page.

Continued on next page

Page 170: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 168 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Filter Panel Numbering (Tx)

The figure below illustrates the filter numbering for Duplex, Triplex and Dual Duplex configurations. The 850 [LAC or BS 8440A (MCPA)] transmit path is also shown. Identify the filter location and configuration for each radio before continuing with this section. The HD product may have in the same frames configuration:

850 (Voice) radios transmitting through SII LACs and AIF, 850 (Voice and EVDO) radios transmitting through BS 8440A (MCPA), PCS (Voice and Data) radios transmitting through Modcell Amps/Filters.

Trace the radio’s Tx cable to determine the appropriate transmit path.

Figure 73: Filter Panel Numbering (Tx)

Continued on next page

Page 171: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 169 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Configure and Update BTS Primary RF Path Map

Use procedures below in case you have no existing BTS Primary RF Path Map XML file and need to create that file based on cell specific configuration. In order to fully configure and update the BTS Primary RF Path Map the following sections must be completed:

Common Data TX1 Radio Settings Common Data TX2 Radio Settings Common Data RX1 Radio Settings Common Data RX2 Radio Settings Update LAM Parameters Misc. Parameters Apply BTS Primary RF Path Map Settings

Common Data TX1 Radio Settings

Follow this procedure to set the TX1 Radio settings for each radio. Each radio has its own RF path and therefore BTS Primary RF Path Map settings are unique.

Step Action

1 On the BTS Primary RF Path Map screen, place a checkmark ( √ ) for each equipped radio (Radio Number 1 through 6).

2 Verify TX1 B3 Cal Gain value is between 35 and 48.

IF TX1 B3 Cal Gain is … … AND the TX1 Port is … THEN set TX1 B3 Cal Gain to …

Transmitting through a Filter in the HD frame

43.00 Outside of range NOTE: After completing this section, RF Power Calibration is needed. Not used or connected to

the HD CAU [LAC or BS 8440A (MCPA)]

44.00

In range N/A Proceed to Step 4.

3 Set the TX1 Antenna value.

IF the Radio TX1 Port is transmitting through ...

THEN set “TX1 Antenna” to …

HD CAU NOTE: Using a SII LAC or BS 8440A (MCPA)

1

Diversity 0 Filter in a Primary frame 1

Diversity 1 Filter in a Primary frame 2

Diversity 0 filter in a Growth 1 frame 3

Diversity 1 filter in a Growth 1 frame 4

Not used 1

NOTE: Refer to Figure 73: Filter Panel Numbering (Tx), on page 168, for information on filter configurations.

Continued on next page

Page 172: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 170 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued Common Data TX1 Radio Settings (continued)

Step Action

4 Determine the TX1 FP Type value.

IF the Radio TX1 Port is transmitting through ...

THEN set TX1 FP Type to ...

Modcell 3.0 type filter Modcell3.0

Dual Duplex type filter DualDuplexer

HD CAU NOTE: Using a SII LAC or BS 8440A (MCPA)

NoFilterPanel

Not used NoFilterPanel

5 Determine TX1 Digital Shelf value.

IF the Radio TX1 Port is transmitting through ...

THEN set TX1 Digital Shelf to ...

Filter in a Primary HD frame Primary

Filter in a Growth 1 HD frame Growth-1

HD CAU NOTE: Using a SII LAC or BS 8440A (MCPA)

Local

Not used Local

6 Set TX1 Filter Shelf to 1.

7 Determine TX1 Filter Panel setting.

IF the Radio’s TX1 port is transmitting through …

THEN set “TX1 Filter Panel” to …

Flexent Filters (Same frame or different frame)

1 – 6

HD CAU NOTE: Using a SII LAC or BS 8440A (MCPA)

0

Not used 0

NOTE: Use the filter number where the Radio’s TX1 Port is connected. Trace the cables from Radio’s TX1 port to the Amplifier and then to the Filter. Refer to Refer to Figure 73: Filter Panel Numbering (Tx), on page 168, for more information on filter configurations.

Continued on next page

Page 173: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 171 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data TX1 Radio Settings (continued)

Step Action

8 Determine the TX1 RF Path value.

IF the Radio’s TX1 port is connected to … THEN set “TX1 RF Path” to …

HD CAU [LAC or BS 8440A (MCPA)], J8 Port (Modcell 3.0 Duplex/Triplex Filter) J8 or J28 Port (Dual Duplex Filter), or Not used (no connection)

1

J9 Port (Modcell 3.0 Triplex Filter) 2

9 Determine the TX1 Coupler Type value.

IF the Radio’s TX1 port is … THEN set “TX1 Coupler Type” to …

Supported by CLGC DPD

Not supported by CLGC Default

HD CAU NOTE: Using a SII LAC or BS 8440A (MCPA)

Default

Not used Default

10 Proceed to Common Data TX2 Radio Settings on page 172.

Continued on next page

Page 174: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 172 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data TX2 Radio Settings

Follow this procedure to set the Radio’s TX2 values. Each radio has its own RF path and therefore BTS Primary RF Path Map settings are unique.

Step Action

1 Verify TX2 B3 Cal Gain value is between 35 and 48.

IF TX2 B3 Cal Gain is … … AND the TX2 Port is … THEN set TX2 B3 Cal Gain to …

Transmitting through a Filter in the HD frame

43.00

HD CAU NOTE: Using a SII LAC or BS 8440A (MCPA)

44.00

Outside of range NOTE: After completing this section, RF Power Calibration is needed.

Not used 44.00

In range N/A Proceed to Step 3.

2 Set the TX2 Antenna value.

IF the Radio’s TX2 port is transmitting through … THEN set “TX2 Antenna” to …

HD CAU NOTE: Using a SII LAC or BS 8440A (MCPA)

1

Diversity 0 Filter in a Primary frame 1

Diversity 1 Filter in a Primary frame 2

Diversity 0 filter in a Growth 1 frame 3

Diversity 1 filter in a Growth 1 frame 4

Not used 1

NOTE: Refer to Refer to Figure 73: Filter Panel Numbering (Tx), on page 168, for more information on filter configurations.

3 Determine the TX2 FP Type value

IF the Radio TX2 Port is transmitting through ... THEN set TX2 FP Type to ...

Modcell 3.0 type filter Modcell3.0

Dual Duplex type filter DualDuplexer

HD CAU NOTE: Using a SII LAC or BS 8440A (MCPA)

NoFilterPanel

Not used NoFilterPanel

Continued on next page

Page 175: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 173 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data TX2 Radio Settings (continued)

Step Action

4 Determine the TX2 Digital Shelf value.

IF the Radio TX2 Port is transmitting through ... THEN set TX2 Digital Shelf to ...

Filter in a Primary HD frame Primary

Filter in a Growth 1 HD frame Growth-1

HD CAU NOTE: Using a SII LAC or BS 8440A (MCPA)

Local

Not used Local

5 Set TX2 Filter Shelf to 1.

6 Determine the TX2 Filter Panel value.

IF the Radio’s TX2 port is transmitting through … THEN set “TX2 Filter Panel” to …

Flexent Filters (Same frame or different frame)

1 – 6

HD CAU NOTE: Using a SII LAC or BS 8440A (MCPA)

0

Not used 0

NOTE: Use the filter number where the Radio’s TX2 Port is connected. Trace the cables from Radio’s TX2 port to the Amplifier and the Filter. Refer to Refer to Figure 73: Filter Panel Numbering (Tx), on page 168, for more information on filter configurations.

7 Determine the TX2 RF Path value.

IF the Radio’s TX2 port is connected to … THEN set “TX2 RF Path” to …

HD CAU (SLAC/BS 8440A (MCPA)), J8 Port (Modcell 3.0 Duplex/Triplex Filter) J8 or J28 Port (Dual Duplex Filter), or Not used (no connection)

1

J9 Port (Modcell 3.0 Triplex Filter) 2

Continued on next page

Page 176: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 174 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data TX2 Radio Settings (continued)

Step Action

8 Determine the TX2 Coupler Type value.

IF the Radio’s TX2 port is … THEN set “TX2 Coupler Type” to …

Supported by CLGC DPD

Not supported by CLGC Default

HD CAU NOTE: Using a SII LAC or BS 8440A (MCPA)

Default

Not used Default

9 Proceed to Common Data RX1 Radio Settings on page 176.

Continued on next page

Page 177: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 175 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Filter Panel Numbering (Rx)

The figure below illustrates the filter numbering for Duplex, Triplex and Dual Duplex configurations. The SII (CAU) receive path is also shown. Identify the filter location and configuration for each radio before continuing with this section. The HD product may have in the same frames configuration:

850 (Voice) radios receiving through SII LACs and AIF, 850 (Voice and EVDO) radios receiving through BS 8440A (MCPA), PCS (Voice and Data) radios receiving through Modcell Amps/Filters.

NOTE: Trace the radio’s Rx cable to determine if the appropriate receive path.

Duplex or Triplex Filter Panels

GammaDiv 1

Filter6

J4

J6

J5

GammaDiv 0

Filter5

J4

J6

J5

BetaDiv 1

Filter4

J4

J6

J5

AlphaDiv 0

Filter1

J4

J6

J5

BetaDiv 0

Filter3

J4

J6

J5

AlphaDiv 1

Filter2

J4

J6

J5

SII AIF(through CAU)

Antenna Interface Frame

(AIF)CAURadio

Dual Duplex Filter Panels

AlphaFilter 1 Filter 2Div 0 Div 1J4 J24J5 J25J6 J26

BetaFilter 3 Filter 4Div 0 Div 1J4 J24J5 J25J6 J26

GammaFilter 5 Filter 6Div 0 Div 1J4 J24J5 J25J6 J26

Slot 1 Slot 3

Slot 3Slot 2

Slot 2

Slot 1

Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6

NOTE: The HD product may have both 850 (Voice) radios (transmitting through SII LACs or BS 8440A (MCPA) and Filters) and 850 (Data) and PCS (Voice and Data) radios (transmitting through Flexent Amps/Filters) in the same frame. Trace the radio’s Rx cable to determine if the appropriate receive path.

Figure 74: Filter Panel Numbering (Rx)

Continued on next page

Page 178: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 176 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data RX1 Radio Settings

Follow this procedure to set the RX1 Radio values.

Step Action

1 Determine the RX1 B2 Cal value.

IF the Radio’s RX1 port is connected to …

THEN set RX1 B2 Cal Loss to …

Dual Duplex filter 1.5

All other filter types 5.0

2 Determine the RX1 Antenna value.

IF the Radio’s RX1 port is connected to … THEN set “RX1 Antenna” to …

Rx Splitter NOTE: Using the HD CAU Shelf.

1

Diversity 0 Filter in a Primary frame 1

Diversity 1 Filter in a Primary frame 2

Diversity 0 filter in a Growth 1 frame 3

Diversity 1 filter in a Growth 1 frame 4

No used 1

NOTE: Refer to Figure 74: Filter Panel Numbering (Rx), on page 175, for information on filter configurations.

3 Determine the RX1 FP Type value.

IF the Radio RX1 Port is connected to ... THEN set RX1 FP Type to ...

Modcell 3.0 type filter panel Modcell3.0

Dual Duplex type filter panel DualDuplexer

Rx Splitter NOTE: Using the HD CAU Shelf.

NoFilterPanel

Not used NoFilterPanel

Continued on next page

Page 179: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 177 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data RX1 Radio Settings (continued)

Step Action

4 Determine the RX1 Digital Shelf value.

IF the Radio RX1 Port is connected to ... THEN set RX1 Digital Shelf to ...

Filter in a Primary HD frame Primary

Filter in a HD Growth frame Growth-1

Rx Splitter NOTE: Using the HD CAU Shelf.

Local

Not used Local

5 Set RX1 Filter Shelf to 1.

6 Determine the RX1 Filter Panel value.

IF the Radio’s RX1 port is connected to … THEN set “RX1 Filter Panel” to …

Flexent Filters (Same frame or different frame)

1 – 6 (See NOTE)

Rx Splitter NOTE: Using the HD CAU Shelf.

0

Not used 0

NOTE: Use the filter number where the Radio’s RX1 port is connected. Trace the cables from the Radio RX1 port to the filter. Refer to Figure 74: Filter Panel Numbering (Rx), on page 175, for more information on filter configurations.

7 Set RX1 RF Path to 1.

8 Set RX1 EAC to Rear EAC.

Continued on next page

Page 180: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 178 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data RX1 Radio Settings (continued)

Step Action

9 Determine the RX1 FP Connector value.

IF the RX1 port of the Radio is connected to the …

THEN set “RX1 FP Connector” to …

Rx Splitter NOTE: Using the HD CAU Shelf.

J4/J24

The J4 or J24 port (any filter type, in any HD frame)

J4/J24

The J5 or J25 port (any filter type, in any HD frame)

J5/J25

The J6 or J26 port (any filter type, in any HD frame)

J6/J26

Not used J4/J24

10 Proceed to Common Data RX2 Radio Settings on page 179.

Continued on next page

Page 181: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 179 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data RX2 Radio Settings

Follow this procedure to determine the RX2 settings for each radio.

Step Action

1 Determine the RX2 B2 Cal value.

IF the Radio’s RX2 port is connected to …

THEN set RX1 B2 Cal Loss to …

Dual Duplex filter 1.5

All other filter type 5.0

2 Determine the RX2 Antenna value.

IF the Radio’s RX2 port is connected to … THEN set “RX2 Antenna” to …

Rx Splitter NOTE: Using the HD CAU Shelf.

1

Diversity 0 Filter in a Primary frame 1

Diversity 1 Filter in a Primary frame 2

Diversity 0 filter in a Growth 1 frame 3

Diversity 1 filter in a Growth 1 frame 4

Not used 1

NOTE: Refer to Figure 74: Filter Panel Numbering (Rx), on page 175, for more information on filter configurations.

3 Determine RX2 FP Type setting.

IF the Radio RX2 Port is connected to ... THEN set RX2 FP Type to ...

Modcell 3.0 type filter panel Modcell3.0

Dual Duplex type filter panel DualDuplexer

Rx Splitter NOTE: Using the HD CAU Shelf.

NoFilterPanel

Not used NoFilterPanel

Continued on next page

Page 182: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 180 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data RX2 Radio Settings (continued)

Step Action

4 Determine the RX2 Digital Shelf value.

IF the Radio RX2 Port is connected to ... THEN set RX2 Digital Shelf to ...

Filter in a Primary HD frame Primary

Filter in an HD Growth frame Growth-1

Rx Splitter NOTE: Using the HD CAU Shelf.

Local

Not used Local

5 Set the RX2 Filter Shelf to 1.

6 Determine the RX2 Filter Panel value.

IF the Radio’s RX2 port is connected to … THEN set “RX2 Filter Panel” to …

Flexent Filters (Same frame or different frame)

1 – 6 (See NOTE)

Rx Splitter NOTE: Using the HD CAU Shelf.

0

Not used 0

NOTE: Use the filter number where the Radio’s RX2 port is connected. Trace the cables from the Radio RX2 port to the filter. Refer to Figure 74: Filter Panel Numbering (Rx), on page 175, for more information on filter configurations.

7 Set RX2 RF Path to 1.

8 Set RX2 EAC to Rear EAC.

Continued on next page

Page 183: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 181 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data RX2 Radio Settings (continued)

Step Action

9 Determine the RX2 FP Connector value.

IF the RX2 port of the Radio is connected to the …

THEN set “RX2 FP Connector” to …

Rx Splitter NOTE: Using the HD CAU Shelf.

J4/J24

The J4 or J24 port (any filter type, in any HD frame)

J4/J24

The J5 or J25 port (any filter type, in any HD frame)

J5/J25

The J6 or J26 port (any filter type, in any HD frame)

J6/J26

Not used J4/J24

10 Proceed to Update LAM Parameters on next page.

Continued on next page

Page 184: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 182 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Update LAM Parameters

Follow this procedure below to configure the LAM Parameters.

Step Action

1 Select LAM Parms.

Figure 75: LAM Parms Screen (example)

Continued on next page

Page 185: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 183 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Update LAM Parameters (continued)

Step Action

2 Set the TX1 Targ Pwr Offset to 0.

3 Set TX1 LAM1 DSN through TX1 LAM6 DSN to 0.

4 Determine the values for: TX1 Lam1 LUN TX1 Lam2 LUN TX1 Lam3 LUN

IF the Radio’s TX1 port is connected to … THEN use …

HD CAU [LAC or BS 8440A (MCPA)] (or is not used)

TX1 Lam1 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam2 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam3 LUN = 0xff

Flexent Amplifier (No Splitter)

TX1 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number Tx1 Lam2 LUN = 0xff Tx1 Lam3 LUN = 0xff

Flexent Amplifier through a 1:2 Splitter

TX1 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX1 Lam2 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number Tx1 Lam3 LUN = 0xff

Flexent Amplifier through a 1:3 Splitter

TX1 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX1 Lam2 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX1 Lam3 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number

5 Set the following to 0xff: TX1 Lam4 LUN TX1 Lam5 LUN TX1 Lam6 LUN

6 Set the TX2 Target Pwr Offset to 0.

7 Set TX2 LAM1 DSN through TX2 LAM6 DSN to 0.

Continued on next page

Page 186: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 184 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Update LAM Parameters (continued)

Step Action

8 Determine the values for: TX2 Lam1 LUN TX2 Lam2 LUN TX2 Lam3 LUN

IF the Radio’s TX2 port is connected to … THEN use …

HD CAU NOTE: Using a SII LAC or BS 8440A (MCPA)

TX1 Lam1 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam2 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam3 LUN = 0xff

Flexent Amplifier (No Splitter)

TX1 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number Tx1 Lam2 LUN = 0xff Tx1 Lam3 LUN = 0xff

Flexent Amplifier through a 1:2 Splitter

TX1 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX1 Lam2 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number Tx1 Lam3 LUN = 0xff

Flexent Amplifier through a 1:3 Splitter

TX1 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX1 Lam2 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX1 Lam3 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number

No used TX1 Lam1 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam2 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam3 LUN = 0xff

9 Set the following to 0xff:

TX2 Lam4 LUN TX2 Lam5 LUN TX2 Lam6 LUN

10 Proceed to Misc. Parameters on page 185.

Continued on next page

Page 187: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 185 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Misc. Parameters Follow this procedure to set the Miscellaneous Parameters.

Step Action

1 Select Misc Parms

Figure 76: Misc Parms Screen (example)

2 Set TX1 Conv UN to 0xff.

3 Set TX2 Conv UN to 0xff.

4 Set RX1 Conv UN to 0xff.

5 Set RX2 Conv UN to 0xff.

6 Set TX1 MCA DS Gain to 0.0.

7 Set TX2 MCA DS Gain to 0.0.

8 Set PAF to NoPafEntered.

9 Set IA MU Type to Not Equipped.

10 Set IA MU LUN to Not Equipped.

Continued on next page

Page 188: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 186 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Misc. Parameters (continued)

Step Action

11 Determine the Ant Test MU Type values.

IF Radio is ... … AND connected to …

… AND … THEN use ...

HD CAU N/A NotEquipped

TDU 1 not equipped NotEquipped

UCR (See NOTE below)

Flexent Amplifier

TDU 1 is equipped RfTestUnit

Supporting 850 EVDO Carrier

NotEquipped Flexent Amplifier in the same frame

Supporting PCS Carriers

Radio

Flexent Amplifier in a different frame

N/A NotEquipped

MCR

HD CAU N/A NotEquipped

Not equipped N/A N/A NotEquipped

NOTE: Refer to TDU Numbering on page 162 for information about TDU numbering.

12 Determine the Ant Test MU LUN values.

IF the Ant Test MU Type is set to …

… AND … THEN set “Ant Test MU LUN” to …

RF Test Unit N/A 1

Radio is 1 or 4 1

Radio is 2 or 5 2

Radio

Radio is 3 or 6 3

Not Equipped N/A NotEquipped

Continued on next page

Page 189: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 187 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued Misc. Parameters (continued)

Step Action

13 Determine the CLGC MU Type value.

IF Radio is ... … AND connected to …

… AND … THEN use ...

HD CAU N/A NotEquipped

TDU 2 not equipped NotEquipped

UCR (See NOTE below)

Flexent Amplifier

TDU 2 is equipped RfTestUnit

Supporting 850 EVDO Carrier

NotEquipped Flexent Amplifier

Supporting PCS Carriers

Radio

MCR

HD CAU N/A NotEquipped

Not equipped N/A N/A NotEquipped

NOTE: Refer to TDU Numbering on page 162 for information about TDU numbering.

14 Determine the CLCG MU LUN values.

IF the CLCG MU Type is set to …

… AND … THEN set “CLCG MU LUN” to …

RF Test Unit N/A 2

Radio is 1 1

Radio is 2 2

Radio is 3 3

Radio is 4 4

Radio is 5 5

Radio

Radio is 6 6

Not Equipped N/A NotEquipped

15 Set DPD MU Type to Not Equipped.

16 Set DPD MU LUN to Not Equipped.

17 Proceed to Apply BTS Primary RF Path Map Settings on page 188.

Continued on next page

Page 190: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 188 November, 2007

HD BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Apply BTS Primary RF Path Map Settings

Follow this procedure to apply the BTS Primary RF Path Map settings. CAUTION: When writing data files to the backplane, any calibration values defined in the existing port map may be over written. See Save Original BTS Primary RF Path Map on page 165 for details on saving existing data. CAUTION: Applying BTS Primary RF Path Map may require Re-calibrating the cell. See Step 4 below.

Step Action

1 Click Apply from the BTS Primary RF Path Map Window.

IF ... THEN ...

More that 1 URC is present in the frame.

Proceed to Step 2.

Only 1 URC is present in the frame Proceed to Step 3.

2 Click Confirm in the Synchronized EEPROM Write window.

NOTE: RMT checks for the existence of other equipped URCs and prompt the user to update the backplane. Verify that all equipped URCs (including Spare URC) are shown and checked (√).

3 Proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 249.

Page 191: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 189 November, 2007

8440 BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION

Section Description

This section describes the procedures to verify and edit the Primary BTS RF Path Map on the following products:

R29 8440 Configurations are defined as lineups that support the R29 interface between the digital shelf and the 8440-A frame.

R29 8440 Configurations include the following lineups: o 8440-D o 8440-HD o 8440-M4

Update the Primary BTS RF Path Map requires the use of the Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT). The procedures specified herein are to be performed if:

Updates are needed to the existing backplane parameters (i.e. HD conversion, during carrier growth, or 8440 installation, or radio growth scenarios);

Problems occur during the integration process of the cell equipment.

When to Update the BTS Primary RF Path Map

BTS Primary RF Path Maps are set in the factory based on the cabinet configuration and equipage. If problems are experienced during the integration efforts related to the BTS RF Primary Path Map and/or when field changes are made to the cabinet, use the following procedures to update the path map information. This section gives instructions for populating each field of the BTS Primary RF Path Map.

Configuration Aid Document (CA 100)

The procedures outlined in this section are supported with the .xml files packaged in the Configuration Aid (CA 100) document. The CA 100 document is available through the Alcatel-Lucent Customer Information Center (CIC) – see CONFIGURATION AID (CA100) INSTALLATION on page 14 for information on accessing and loading this document. The CA 100 document includes:

• The various cell configurations, • Configuration overview, • Schematics, • Backplane programming information, • Applicable RF power calibration sections, and • Packaged XML files.

Test Equipment Information

The following provides test equipment information that pertains to the 8440 configurations.

MCR Connections

The MCR transmits through a Duplex 8440-A Filter. The MCR supports both Antenna Test and Pilot Power Measurements (PPM). The following ports on the MCR are used for these functions:

MCR Port 8440 Duplex Filter Connection Function

RC1 J41 Pilot Power Measurements

RC2 N/A N/A

TONE J41 Antenna Test NOTE: CLGC is not supported. Antenna Tests are not supported on UCRs.

Continued on next page

Page 192: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 190 November, 2007

8440 BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Save Original BTS Primary RF Path Map

Follow this procedure to save the original BTS Primary RF Path Map. NOTE: It is highly recommended to save the original factory BTS Primary RF Path Map because it may contain calibration data or for “back out” procedures.

Step Action

1 Click Config → RF Calibration → BTS Primary RF Path Map, from the RMT main screen. A window appears as shown below.

Figure 77: BTS Primary RF Path Map (example)

2 Select Common Data from the “Version” box at the top of the window.

Continued on next page

Page 193: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 191 November, 2007

8440 BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Save Original BTS Primary RF Path Map (continued)

Step Action

3 Select the URC.

IF saving Path Map for … THEN set “Select the URC you want to update” to …

URC1 1

URC2 2

URC3 3

4 Click Save in the Configuration File Box to save a copy of the current Primary RF Path Map. NOTE: After clicking Save, type the filename as shown below and save it to a directory as desired. Refer to SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE on page 242 for procedures to create a directory to store files. Cell x Original Radio Path Map where x = Cell Number

Verify Port Map Version

Follow this procedure to verify the Port Map Version is set to 1. NOTE: The Port Map Version for all URCs must be set to 1.

Step Action

1 Determine the current Port Map Version. NOTE: The Port Map Version is located on the top right of the BTS Primary RF Path Map screen. See Figure 77 on page 190.

2 Update the Port Map Version as needed.

IF the Port Map Version is …

THEN …

0

Proceed to CHANGING PORT MAP VERSIONS on page 247 to change the Port Map Version to 1.

Proceed to Step 3.

1 Proceed to Step 3.

Continued on next page

Page 194: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 192 November, 2007

8440 BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Filter Panel Numbering (Tx)

The figure below illustrates the filter numbering for 8440 Duplex configurations. Identify the filter location and configuration for each radio before continuing with this section. The BTS 8440 product may have in the same configuration:

850 (Voice and EVDO) radios transmitting through an 850 8440-A (MCPA), PCS (Voice and Data) radios transmitting through separate PCS 8440-A.

The illustration shows an 850 8440-A example. A PCS 8440-A frame will not have separate Band Pass Filters assemblies, but the frame layout is the same as far as filter shelf / panel numbering.

Figure 78: Filter Panel Numbering (Tx)

Continued on next page

Alpha - Filter Shelf 1 Filter Panel 1

Beta - Filter Shelf 2 Filter Panel 1

Gamma - Filter Shelf 3 Filter Panel 1

Page 195: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 193 November, 2007

8440 BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Configure and Update BTS Primary RF Path Map

Use procedures below when you do not have a BTS Primary RF Path Map XML file and need to create that file based on cell specific configuration. In order to fully configure and update the BTS Primary RF Path Map the following sections must be completed:

Common Data TX1 Radio Settings Common Data TX2 Radio Settings Common Data RX1 Radio Settings Common Data RX2 Radio Settings Update LAM Parameters Misc. Parameters Apply BTS Primary RF Path Map Settings

Common Data TX1 Radio Settings

Follow this procedure to set the TX1 Radio settings for each radio. Each radio has its own RF path and therefore BTS Primary RF Path Map settings are unique.

Step Action

1 On the BTS Primary RF Path Map screen, place a checkmark ( √ ) for each equipped radio (Radio Number 1 through 6).

2 Verify TX1 B3 Cal Gain value is between 41 and 53.

IF TX1 B3 Cal Gain is … … AND the TX1 Port is … THEN set TX1 B3 Cal Gain to …

Used 48.00 Outside of range NOTE: After completing this section, RF Power Calibration is needed. Not used 44.00

In range N/A Proceed to Step 4.

3 Set the TX1 Antenna value.

IF the Radio TX1 Port is transmitting through ...

THEN set “TX1 Antenna” to …

850 8440-A frame or Single Band PCS line-up

1

Dual Band PCS line-up 3

NOTE: Refer to Figure 78, on page 192, for information on filter configurations.

Continued on next page

Page 196: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 194 November, 2007

8440 BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data TX1 Radio Settings (continued)

Step Action

4 Set the TX1 FP Type to McpaFP.

5 Determine TX1 Digital Shelf value.

IF the Digital Shelf is ... THEN set TX2 Digital Shelf to ...

850 or Single Band PCS Primary

Primary

Dual Band PCS in the 8440-D or Growth 1 Growth-1

Dual Band PCS Growth 2 Growth -2

Dual Band PCS Growth 3 Growth -3

6 Determine TX1 Filter Shelf value.

IF the Radio is transmitting through ... THEN set TX1 Filter Shelf to ...

Alpha Sector 1

Beta Sector 2

Gamma Sector 3

7 Set the TX1 Filter Panel setting to 1.

8 Set the TX1 RF Path to 1.

9 Set the TX1 Coupler Type to Default.

10 Proceed to Common Data TX2 Radio Settings on page 195.

Continued on next page

Page 197: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 195 November, 2007

8440 BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data TX2 Radio Settings

Follow this procedure to set the Radio’s TX2 values. Each radio has its own RF path and therefore BTS Primary RF Path Map settings are unique.

Step Action

1 Verify TX2 B3 Cal Gain value is between 41 and 53.

IF TX2 B3 Cal Gain is … … AND the TX2 Port is … THEN set TX2 B3 Cal Gain to …

Used 48.00 Outside of range NOTE: After completing this section, RF Power Calibration is needed. Not used 44.00

In range N/A Proceed to Step 3.

2 Set the TX2 Antenna value.

IF digital shelf is … THEN set “TX2 Antenna” to …

850 or Single Band PCS lineup

1

Dual Band PCS lineup 3

NOTE: Refer to Figure 78, on page 192, for more information on filter configurations.

3 Set the TX2 FP Type to McpaFP.

Continued on next page

Page 198: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 196 November, 2007

8440 BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued Common Data TX2 Radio Settings (continued)

Step Action

4 Determine the TX2 Digital Shelf value.

IF the Digital Shelf is ... THEN set TX2 Digital Shelf to ...

850 or Single Band PCS Primary

Primary

Dual Band PCS in the 8440-D or Growth 1 Growth-1

Dual Band PCS Growth 2 Growth-2

Dual Band PCS Growth 3 Growth-3

5 Determine TX2 Filter Shelf value.

IF the Radio is transmitting through ... THEN set TX2 Filter Shelf to ...

Alpha Sector 1

Beta Sector 2

Gamma Sector 3

6 Set the TX2 Filter Panel to 1.

7 Set the TX2 RF Path value to 1.

8 Set the TX2 Coupler Type value to Default.

9 Proceed to Common Data RX1 Radio Settings on page 198.

Continued on next page

Page 199: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 197 November, 2007

8440 BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Filter Panel Layout (Rx)

The figure below illustrates the filter layout for 8440 configurations. NOTE: The MCR Rx cable will connect to J5 (RX0) and J25 (RX1) for the receive paths. (The 850 radio could be a UCR)

Figure 79: 850 Filter Panel Layout (Rx)

Figure 80: PCS Filter Panel Layout (Rx)

Continued on next page

J5 J25

J5 J25

Page 200: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 198 November, 2007

8440 BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data RX1 Radio Settings

Follow this procedure to set the RX1 Radio values.

Step Action

1 Determine the RX1 B2 Cal value.

IF the Digital Shelf is … THEN set RX1 B2 Cal Loss to …

850 and directly adjacent to the Amplifiers

5.7

850 and Not adjacent 6.4

PCS and directly adjacent to the Amplifiers 6.5

PCS and Not adjacent 7.6

2 Determine the RX1 Antenna value.

IF the Digital Shelf is … THEN set “RX1 Antenna” to …

850 or Single Band PCS lineup

1

Dual Band PCS lineup 3

3 Determine the RX1 FP Type to McpaFP.

4 Determine the RX1 Digital Shelf value.

IF the Digital Shelf is ... THEN set RX1 Digital Shelf to ...

850 or Single Band PCS Primary

Primary

Dual Band PCS in the 8440-D or Growth 1 Growth-1

Dual Band PCS Growth 2 Growth-2

Dual Band PCS Growth 3 Growth-3

Continued on next page

Page 201: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 199 November, 2007

8440 BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data RX1 Radio Settings (continued)

Step Action

5 Determine the RX1 Filter Shelf value.

IF the Radio is receiving through ... THEN set RX1 Filter Shelf to ...

Alpha Sector 1

Beta Sector 2

Gamma Sector 3 6 Set the RX1 Filter Panel value to 1.

7 Set the RX1 RF Path to 1.

8 Set RX1 EAC to Rear EAC.

9 Set the RX1 FP Connector to J5/J25.

10 Proceed to Common Data RX2 Radio Settings on page 200.

Continued on next page

Page 202: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 200 November, 2007

8440 BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data RX2 Radio Settings

Follow this procedure to determine the RX2 settings for each radio.

Step Action

1 Determine the RX2 B2 Cal value.

IF the Digital Shelf is … THEN set RX2 B2 Cal Loss to …

850 and directly adjacent to the Amplifiers

5.7

850 and Not adjacent 6.4

PCS and directly adjacent to the Amplifiers 6.5

PCS and Not adjacent 7.6

2 Determine the RX2 Antenna value.

IF the Digital Shelf is … THEN set “RX2 Antenna” to …

850 or Single Band PCS Primary

2

Dual Band PCS 4

3 Set the RX2 FP Type to McpaFP.

Continued on next page

Page 203: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 201 November, 2007

8440 BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data RX2 Radio Settings (continued)

Step Action

4 Determine the RX2 Digital Shelf value.

IF the Digital Shelf is ... THEN set RX1 Digital Shelf to ...

850 or Single Band PCS Primary

Primary

Dual Band PCS in the 8440-D or Growth 1 Growth-1

Dual Band PCS Growth 2 Growth-2

Dual Band PCS Growth 3 Growth-3

5 Determine the RX2 Filter Shelf value.

IF the Radio is receiving through ... THEN set RX2 Filter Shelf to ...

Alpha Sector 1

Beta Sector 2

Gamma Sector 3 6 Set the RX2 Filter Panel to 1.

7 Set RX2 RF Path to 1.

8 Set RX2 EAC to Rear EAC.

9 Set the RX2 FP Connector value to J5/J25.

10 Proceed to Update LAM Parameters on next page.

Continued on next page

Page 204: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 202 November, 2007

8440 BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Update LAM Parameters

Follow this procedure below to configure the LAM Parameters.

Step Action

1 Select LAM Parms.

Figure 81: LAM Parms Screen (example)

Continued on next page

Page 205: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 203 November, 2007

8440 BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Update LAM Parameters (continued)

Step Action

2 Set the TX1 Targ Pwr Offset to 0.

3 Set TX1 LAM1 DSN through TX1 LAM6 DSN to 0.

4 Set the TX1 Lam1 through Lam4 LUN values as follows:

IF the Radio’s TX1 port is connected to … THEN use …

Sector 1 (Alpha) Sub-rack

TX1 Lam1 LUN = 1 TX1 Lam2 LUN = 2 TX1 Lam3 LUN = 3 TX1 Lam4 LUN = 4

Sector 2 (Beta) Sub-rack TX1 Lam1 LUN = 5 Tx1 Lam2 LUN = 6 Tx1 Lam3 LUN = 7 TX1 Lam4 LUN = 8

Sector 3 (Gamma) Sub-rack

TX1 Lam1 LUN = 9 TX1 Lam2 LUN = 10 Tx1 Lam3 LUN = 11 TX1 Lam4 LUN = 12

5 Set the following to 0xff: TX1 Lam5 LUN TX1 Lam6 LUN

6 Set the TX2 Target Pwr Offset to 0.

7 Set TX2 LAM1 DSN through TX2 LAM6 DSN to 0.

Continued on next page

Page 206: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 204 November, 2007

8440 BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Update LAM Parameters (continued)

Step Action

8 Set the TX2 Lam1 through Lam4 LUN values as follows:

IF the Radio’s TX2 port is connected to … THEN use …

Sector 1 (Alpha) Sub-rack

TX2 Lam1 LUN = 1 TX2 Lam2 LUN = 2 TX2 Lam3 LUN = 3 TX2 Lam4 LUN = 4

Sector 2 (Beta) Sub-rack TX2 Lam1 LUN = 5 Tx2 Lam2 LUN = 6 Tx2 Lam3 LUN = 7 TX2 Lam4 LUN = 8

Sector 3 (Gamma) Sub-rack

TX2 Lam1 LUN = 9 TX2 Lam2 LUN = 10 Tx2 Lam3 LUN = 11 TX2 Lam4 LUN = 12

9 Set the following to 0xff: TX2 Lam5 LUN TX2 Lam6 LUN

10 Proceed to Misc. Parameters on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 207: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 205 November, 2007

8440 BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Misc. Parameters Follow this procedure to set the Miscellaneous Parameters.

Step Action

1 Select Misc Parms

Figure 82: Misc Parms Screen (example)

2 Set TX1 Conv UN to 0xff.

3 Set TX2 Conv UN to 0xff.

4 Set RX1 Conv UN to 0xff.

5 Set RX2 Conv UN to 0xff.

6 Set TX1 MCA DS Gain to 0.0.

7 Set TX2 MCA DS Gain to 0.0.

8 Set PAF to Alpha – Radio 1 & 4, Beta – Radio 2 & 5, Gamma – Radio 3 & 6.

9 Set IA MU Type to Not Equipped.

10 Set IA MU LUN to Not Equipped.

Continued on next page

Page 208: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 206 November, 2007

8440 BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Misc. Parameters (continued)

Step Action

11 Determine the Ant Test MU Type values.

IF Radio is ... THEN use ...

UCR

NotEquipped

MCR Radio

12 Determine the Ant Test MU LUN values.

IF the Ant Test MU Type is set to …

… AND … THEN set “Ant Test MU LUN” to …

Radio is 1 or 4 1

Radio is 2 or 5 2

Radio

Radio is 3 or 6 3

13 Set the CLGC MU Type to NotEquipped.

14 Set CLCG MU LUN to NotEquipped.

15 Set DPD MU Type to NotEquipped.

16 Set DPD MU LUN to NotEquipped.

17 Set the PPM MU Type to match the Ant Test MU Type.

18 Set the PPM MU LUN to match the Ant Test MU LUN.

19 Proceed to Apply BTS Primary RF Path Map Settings on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 209: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 207 November, 2007

8440 BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Apply BTS Primary RF Path Map Settings

Follow this procedure to apply the BTS Primary RF Path Map settings. CAUTION: When writing data files to the backplane, any calibration values defined in the existing port map may be over written. See Save Original BTS Primary RF Path Map on page 190 for details on saving existing data. CAUTION: Applying BTS Primary RF Path Map may require Re-calibrating the cell.

Step Action

1 Click Apply from the BTS Primary RF Path Map Window.

IF ... THEN ...

More that 1 URC is present in the frame.

Proceed to Step 2.

Only 1 URC is present in the frame Proceed to Step 3.

2 Click Confirm in the Synchronized EEPROM Write window.

NOTE: RMT checks for the existence of other equipped URCs and prompt the user to update the backplane. Verify that all equipped URCs (including Spare URC) are shown and checked (√).

3 Proceed to FINAL PROCEDURES on page 249.

Page 210: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 208 November, 2007

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 211: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 209 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION

Section Description

This section describes the procedures to verify and edit the Primary BTS RF Path Map on the following products:

Modcell 4.0, Modcell 4.0B, Compact 4.0, Compact 4.0B, 850MHz Compact RU/BU 450MHz Standard Compact, or 450MHz Compact RU/BU Base Station 2400 Base Station 4400 (with UCRs or MCRs), Base Station 4401, Base Station 8420, Base Station 8401

When to Update the BTS Primary RF Path Map

BTS Primary RF Path Maps are set in the factory based on the cabinet configuration and equipage. If problems are experienced during the integration efforts related to the BTS RF Primary Path Map and/or when field changes are made to the cabinet, use the following procedures to update the path map information. This section gives instructions for populating each field of the BTS Primary RF Path Map.

Configuration Aid Document (CA 100)

The procedures outlined in this section are supported with the .xml files packaged in the Configuration Aid (CA 100) document. The CA 100 document is available through the Alcatel-Lucent Customer Information Center (CIC) – see CONFIGURATION AID (CA100) INSTALLATION on page 14 for information on accessing and loading this document. The CA 100 document includes:

• The various cell configurations, • Configuration overview, • Schematics, • Backplane programming information, • Applicable RF power calibration sections, and • Packaged XML files.

Continued on next page

Page 212: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 210 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Test Equipment Information

The following provides test equipment information that pertains to the various Modcell configurations.

TDU Numbering A frame can be equipped with the two TDUs (TDU 1 and TDU 2). TDU 1 is used for antenna tests while TDU 2 is used for Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC). RMT does not reference TDUs in the same manner as ECP Database translations. See the table below. This Handbook section follows the RMT convention and refers to the TDUs in a frame as TDU 1 or TDU 2.

Frame RMT Reference Database Translation Reference Function

1 1 Antenna Test Primary

2 2 CLGC

1 5 Antenna Test Growth #1

2 6 CLGC

1 9 Antenna Test Growth #2

2 10 CLGC

Growth #3 Not Applicable. TDUs are not support in a Growth #3 frame.

TDU Connections TDU 1 connects to the J2 & J3 ports for Duplex and Triplex filters, or to the J41 port for Dual Duplex filters. TDU 2 connects to the external coupler on the filter for Duplex and Triplex filters, or to the J11 & J31 ports for Dual Duplex filters.

MCR Connections

For Flexent RF paths, the MCR connects to a Dual Duplex Filter (See Exception below). The MCR supports both Antenna Test and Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC). The following ports on the MCR are used for these functions:

MCR Port Dual Duplex Filter Connection Function

RC1 J11 CLGC

(for Tx1 port)

RC2 J31 CLGC

(for Tx2 port)

TONE J41 Antenna Test Exception: Note the following configuration:

Legacy Modcell Primary frame with Modcell 4.0 Growth 1 (supporting 8 – 850 B-band Carriers)

In this configuration, radios 4, 5 and 6 can optionally be MCRs which connect to Modcell 3.0 Filters in the Legacy Primary frame. The MCR in this configuration does not support Antenna Test and CLGC and the RC1, RC2 and TONE ports are not used.

Continued on next page

Page 213: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 211 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Filter Panel Numbering (Tx)

The figure below illustrates the filter numbering for Duplex, Triplex and Dual Duplex configurations. Identify the filter location and configuration for each radio before continuing with this section. NOTE: Figure 83 is continued on the next page.

Figure 83: Filter Panel Numbering (Tx)

Continued on next page

Page 214: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 212 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Filter Panel Numbering (Tx) (continued)

Figure 83: Filter Panel Numbering (Tx), Cont’d

Continued on next page

Page 215: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 213 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Save Original BTS Primary RF Path Map

Follow this procedure to save the original BTS Primary RF Path Map. NOTE: It is highly recommended to save the original factory BTS Primary RF Path Map because it may contain calibration data or for “back out” procedures.

Step Action

1 Click Config → RF Calibration → BTS Primary RF Path Map, from the RMT main screen. A window appears as shown below.

Figure 84: BTS Primary RF Path Map (example)

2 Select Common Data from the “Version” box at the top of the window.

Continued on next page

Page 216: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 214 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Save Original BTS Primary RF Path Map (continued)

Step Action

3 Select the URC.

IF saving Path Map for … THEN set “Select the URC you want to update” to …

URC1 1

URC2 2

URC3 3

4 Click Save in the Configuration File Box to save a copy of the current Primary RF Path Map. NOTE: After clicking Save, type the filename as shown below and save it to a directory as desired. Refer to SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE on page 242 for procedures to create a directory to store files. Cell x Original Radio Path Map where x = Cell Number

Verify Port Map Version

Follow this procedure to verify the Port Map Version is set to 1. NOTE: The Port Map Version for all URCs must be set to 1.

Step Action

1 Determine the current Port Map Version. NOTE: The Port Map Version is located on the top right of the BTS Primary RF Path Map screen. Refer to Figure 84 on page 213.

2 Update the Port Map Version as needed.

IF the Port Map Version is …

THEN …

0

Proceed to CHANGING PORT MAP VERSIONS on page 247 to change the Port Map Version to 1.

Proceed to Step 3.

1 Proceed to Step 3.

3 Proceed to How to Recall A BTS Primary RF Path Map XML File on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 217: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 215 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

How to Recall A BTS Primary RF Path Map XML File

This procedure below is used during field installation upgrades with the XML files that are packaged with the CA 100 document or with a known good XML file.

Step Action

1 Open the “BTS Primary RF Path Map” window (if it is not already open) from the RMT main menu select:

Config RF Calibration BTS Primary RF Path Map

2 Set the desired URC number in the field Select the URC you want to update.

3 Click on Recall under the Configuration File heading.

4 Check that desired configuration file is covered under the CA 100 document and/or the required file is saved on the laptop.

IF ... THEN ...

Yes Go to step 5.

No Go to Configure and Update BTS Primary RF Path Map on page 217.

5 Select the desired Primary RF Path Map XML file for the cell configuration.

NOTE: Below is an example of the CA 100 file directory.

6 Go to Apply BTS Primary RF Path Map Settings on the page 216.

Continued on next page

Page 218: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 216 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Apply BTS Primary RF Path Map Settings

Follow this procedure to apply the BTS Primary RF Path Map settings. CAUTIONS:

When writing data files to the backplane, any calibration values defined in the existing port map may be over written. See Save Original BTS Primary RF Path Map on page 213 for details on saving existing data.

Applying BTS Primary RF Path Map may require Re-calibrating the cell.

Step Action

1 Click Apply from the BTS Primary RF Path Map Window.

IF ... THEN ...

More that 1 URC is present in the frame.

Proceed to Step 2.

Only 1 URC is present in the frame Proceed to Step 3.

2 Click Confirm in the Synchronized EEPROM Write window.

NOTE: RMT checks for the existence of other equipped URCs and prompt the user to update the backplane. Verify that all equipped URCs are shown and checked (√).

3 Click Cancel in the BTS Primary RF Path Map window.

Continued on next page

Page 219: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 217 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Configure and Update BTS Primary RF Path Map

Follow these procedures for configuring and updating the BTS Primary RF Path Map.

Common Data TX1 Radio Settings

Follow this procedure to set the TX1 Radio settings for each radio. Each radio has its own RF path and therefore BTS Primary RF Path Map settings are unique.

Step Action

1 On the BTS Primary RF Path Map screen, place a checkmark ( √ ) for each equipped radio (Radio Number 1through 6). NOTE: Fields for unequipped radios are automatically set to their default values by RMT during the write operation (i.e. after clicking Apply).

2 Verify TX1 B3 Cal Gain value is between 35 and 48.

IF TX1 B3 Cal Gain is … THEN …

Outside of range Set “TX1 B3 Cal Gain” to 44.00. NOTE: After completing this section, RF Power Calibration is needed.

In range Proceed to Step 3.

Continued on next page

Page 220: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 218 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data TX1 Radio Settings (continued)

Step Action

3 Set the TX1 Antenna value.

IF the frame is … … AND the Radio’s TX1 port is transmitting through …

THEN set “TX1 Antenna” to …

No Filter (or is not used) 1

850 Diversity 0 Filter 1

850 Diversity 1 Filter 2

PCS Diversity 0 Filter 3

Base Station 8401 or Base Station 8420 (Dual Band)

PCS Diversity 1 Filter 4

Diversity 0 Filter in Slot 1, 2, or 3 (Filter 1, 3, or 5)

1 Modcell 4.0B Primary (with Intelligent Antenna Calibration Unit (IACU))

Diversity 0 Filter in Slot 4, 5, or 6 (Filter 7, 9, or 11)

3

Modcell 4.0B PCS Growth-1 (with IACU equipped in the M4.0B 850 Primary Frame)

Diversity 0 Filter in Slot 1, 2, or 3 (Filter 1, 3, or 5)

5

No Filter (or is not used) 1

Diversity 0 Filter in a Primary frame

1

Diversity 1 Filter in a Primary frame

2

Diversity 0 Filter in a Growth 1, 2 or 3 frame

3

Base Station 8420 (Single Band) or Any other cabinet type

Diversity 1 Filter in a Growth 1, 2, or 3 frame

4

NOTE: Refer to Figure 85 on page 224 for information on filter configurations.

Continued on next page

Page 221: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 219 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data TX1 Radio Settings (continued)

Step Action

4 Determine the TX1 FP Type value.

IF the Radio is …

… AND TX1 port is transmitting through …

THEN set “TX1 FP Type” to…

No Filter (or is not used) NoFilterPanel

Modcell 3.0 Filter Modcell3.0

In a Primary frame

Dual Duplex Filter DualDuplexer

An 850 UCR in a Korean 4.0 Co-Located frame

Filter not equipped in the same cabinet Modcell2.0

No Filter (or is not used) NoFilterPanel

Filter not equipped in the same cabinet (See NOTE)

NoFilterPanel

Modcell 3.0 Filter equipped in the same cabinet Modcell3.0

In a Growth 1, 2, or 3 frame

A Dual Duplexer Filter equipped in the same cabinet DualDuplexer

No Filter (or is not used) NoFilterPanel In a Growth 1 frame

Modcell 3.0 Filter equipped in Primary Modcell3.0

5 Determine TX1 Digital Shelf value.

IF the TX1 port is transmitting through …

… AND “TX1 FP Type” is …

THEN set “TX1 Digital Shelf” to …

No Filter (or is not used) (any setting) Local

Modcell3.0 Primary

DualDuplexer Primary

Filters in the Primary cabinet

NoFilterPanel Local

Filters in the Growth 1 cabinet (any setting) Growth-1

Filters in the Growth 2 cabinet (any setting) Growth-2

Filters in the Growth 3 cabinet (any setting) Growth-3

Continued on next page

Page 222: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 220 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data TX1 Radio Settings (continued)

Step Action

6 Set TX1 Filter Shelf to 1.

7 Determine TX1 Filter Panel setting.

IF the Radio’s TX1 port is transmitting through …

… AND a CLGC Ethernet Hub is …

THEN set “TX1 Filter Panel” to…

Filter in the same frame N/A 1 – 12 (see NOTE below)

Equipped 1 – 6 (see NOTE below)

Filter in a different frame

Not Equipped 0

A filter in another vendor’s equipment (i.e. Korean 4.0 Co-located cells)

N/A 0xff

No Filter (or is not used) N/A 0

NOTE: Use the filter number where the Radio’s TX1 Port is connected. Trace the cables from Radio’s TX1 port to the Amplifier (if equipped) and then to the Filter.

NOTE: Refer to Figure 85 on page 224 for information on filter configurations.

8 Determine the TX1 RF Path value.

IF the Radio’s TX1 port is connected to … THEN set “TX1 RF Path” to …

J8 Port (Modcell 3.0 Duplex/Triplex Filter), J8 or J28 Port (Dual Duplex Filter), or Not used (no connection)

1

J9 Port (Modcell 3.0 Triplex Filter) 2

9 Determine the TX1 Coupler Type value.

IF the Radio’s TX1 port is … THEN set “TX1 Coupler Type” to …

Supported by CLGC DPD

Not supported by CLGC Default

Not used (no connection) Default

10 Proceed to Common Data TX2 Radio Settings on page 221.

Continued on next page

Page 223: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 221 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data TX2 Radio Settings

Follow this procedure to set the Radio’s TX2 values. Each radio has its own RF path and therefore BTS Primary RF Path Map settings are unique.

Step Action

1 Verify TX2 B3 Cal Gain value is between 35 and 48.

IF TX2 B3 Cal Gain is … THEN …

Outside of range Set “TX2 B3 Cal Gain” to 44.00. NOTE: After completing this section, RF Power Calibration is needed.

In range Proceed to Step 2.

2 Set the TX2 Antenna value.

IF the frame is … … AND the Radio’s TX2 port is transmitting through …

THEN set “TX2 Antenna” to …

Diversity 1 Filter in Slot 1, 2, or 3 (Filter 2, 4, or 6)

2 Modcell 4.0B Primary (with Intelligent Antenna Calibration Unit (IACU))

Diversity 1 Filter in Slot 4, 5, or 6 (Filter 8, 10, or 12)

4

Modcell 4.0B PCS Growth-1 (with IACU equipped in the M4.0B 850 Primary Frame)

Diversity 1 Filter in Slot 1, 2, or 3 (Filter 2, 4, or 6)

6

No Filter (or is not used) 1

Diversity 0 Filter in a Primary frame

1

Diversity 1 Filter in a Primary frame

2

Diversity 0 Filter in a Growth 1, 2 or 3 frame

3

Any other cabinet type

Diversity 1 Filter in a Growth 1, 2, or 3 frame

4

NOTE: Refer to Figure 85 on page 224 for information on filter configurations.

Continued on next page

Page 224: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 222 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data TX2 Radio Settings (continued)

Step Action

3 Determine the TX2 FP Type value.

IF the Radio is … … AND TX2 port is transmitting through …

THEN set “TX2 FP Type” to…

No Filter (or is not used) NoFilterPanel

Modcell 3.0 Filter Modcell3.0

In a Primary frame

Dual Duplex Filter DualDuplexer

An 850 UCR in a Korean 4.0 Co-Located frame

Filter not equipped in the same cabinet Modcell2.0

No Filter (or is not used) NoFilterPanel

Filter not equipped in the same cabinet (See NOTE)

NoFilterPanel

Modcell 3.0 Filter equipped in the same cabinet Modcell3.0

In a Growth 1, 2, or 3 frame

A Dual Duplexer Filter equipped in the same cabinet DualDuplexer

No Filter (or is not used) NoFilterPanel In a Growth 1 frame

Modcell 3.0 Filter equipped in Primary Modcell3.0

4 Determine the TX2 Digital Shelf value.

IF the TX2 port is transmitting through …

… AND “TX2 FP Type” is …

THEN set “TX2 Digital Shelf” to …

No Filter (or is not used) (any setting) Local

Modcell3.0 Primary

DualDuplexer Primary

Filters in the Primary cabinet

NoFilterPanel Local

Filters in the Growth1 cabinet (any setting) Growth-1

Filters in the Growth 2 cabinet (any setting) Growth-2

Filters in the Growth 3 cabinet (any setting) Growth-3

5 Set TX2 Filter Shelf to 1.

Continued on next page

Page 225: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 223 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data TX2 Radio Settings (continued)

Step Action

6 Determine the TX2 Filter Panel value.

IF the Radio’s TX2 port is transmitting through …

… AND a CLGC Ethernet Hub is …

THEN set “TX2 Filter Panel” to…

Filter in the same frame N/A 1 – 6 (for 3 Sector) 1 – 12 (for 6 Sector)

Equipped 1 – 6 Filter in a different frame

Not Equipped 0

A filter in another vendor’s equipment (i.e. Korean 4.0 Co-located cells)

N/A 0xff

No Filter (or is not used) N/A 0

NOTE: Use the filter number where the Radio’s TX2 Port is connected. Trace the cables from Radio’s TX2 port to the Amplifier and then to the Filter. Refer to Figure 85 on page 224 for information on filter configurations.

7 Determine the TX2 RF Path value.

IF the Radio’s TX2 port is connected to … THEN set “TX2 RF Path” to …

J8 Port (Modcell 3.0 Duplex/Triplex Filter), J8 or J28 Port (Dual Duplex Filter), or Not used (no connection)

1

J9 Port (Modcell 3.0 Triplex Filter) 2

8 Determine the TX2 Coupler Type value.

IF the Radio’s TX2 port is … THEN set “TX2 Coupler Type” to …

Supported by CLGC DPD

Not supported by CLGC Default

Not used (no connection) Default

9 Proceed to Common Data RX1 Radio Settings on page 226.

Continued on next page

Page 226: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 224 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Filter Panel Numbering (Rx)

The figure below illustrates the filter numbering for Duplex, Triplex and Dual Duplex configurations. Identify the filter location and configuration for each radio before continuing with this section. NOTE: Figure 85 is continued on the next page.

Duplex or Triplex Filter Panels

(3 Sector)J4

J6

J5

J4

J6

J5

J4

J6

J5

J4

J6

J5

J4

J6

J5

J4

J6

J5

Dual Duplex Filter Panels

(3 Sector)

AlphaFilter 1 Filter 2Div 0 Div 1J4 J24J5 J25J6 J26

BetaFilter 3 Filter 4Div 0 Div 1J4 J24J5 J25J6 J26

GammaFilter 5 Filter 6Div 0 Div 1J4 J24J5 J25J6 J26

GammaDiv 1

Filter6

GammaDiv 0

Filter5

BetaDiv 1

Filter4

AlphaDiv 0

Filter1

BetaDiv 0

Filter3

AlphaDiv 1

Filter2

Slot 2

Slot 2

Slot 1

Slot 1 Slot 3

Slot 5Slot 3 Slot 6Slot 4

Figure 85: Filter Panel Numbering (Rx)

Continued on next page

Page 227: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 225 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Figure 85: Filter Panel Numbering (Rx), Cont.

Continued on next page

Page 228: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 226 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data RX1 Radio Settings

Follow this procedure to set the RX1 Radio values.

Step Action

1 Determine the RX1 B2 Cal value.

IF Radio’s RX1 port is connected to … THEN set RX1 B2 Cal Loss to …

Dual Duplex Filter 1.5*

All other filter type or No equipped filter

5.0*

*NOTE: RMT populates the B2 value during Off-Line RMT Calibration procedures. RMT populates the B2 value based on frequency band as well as filter type. The values above are just nominal values.

2 Determine the RX1 Antenna value.

IF the frame is … … AND the Radio’s RX1 port is connected to …

THEN set “RX1 Antenna” to …

Diversity 0 Filter in Slot 1, 2, or 3 (Filter 1, 3, or 5)

1 Modcell 4.0B Primary (with Intelligent Antenna Calibration Unit (IACU)) Diversity 0 Filter in Slot 4, 5, or 6

(Filter 7, 9, or 11) 3

Modcell 4.0B PCS Growth-1 (with IACU equipped in the M4.0B 850 Primary Frame)

Diversity 0 Filter in Slot 1, 2, or 3 (Filter 1, 3, or 5)

5

No Filter (or is not used) 1

Diversity 0 Filter in a Primary frame

1

Diversity 1 Filter in a Primary frame

2

Diversity 0 Filter in a Growth 1, 2 or 3 frame

3

Any other cabinet type

Diversity 1 Filter in a Growth 1, 2, or 3 frame

4

NOTE: The RX1 port may not be connected directly to a filter. In some cases it connects to a splitter that connects to a filter (this occurs when there are more than 3 radios per sector).

Continued on next page

Page 229: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 227 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data RX1 Radio Settings (continued)

Step Action

3 Determine the RX1 FP Type value.

IF the Radio is in a …

… AND RX1 port is connected to …

THEN set “RX1 FP Type” to…

No Filter (or is not used) NoFilterPanel

Modcell 3.0 Filter Modcell3.0

Primary frame

Dual Duplex Filter DualDuplexer

No Filter (or is not used) NoFilterPanel

Filter not equipped in the same cabinet (See NOTE)

NoFilterPanel

Modcell 3.0 Filter equipped in the same cabinet Modcell 3.0

Growth 1, 2, or 3 frame

A Dual Duplexer Filter equipped in the same cabinet DualDuplexer

No Filter (or is not used) NoFilterPanel

Modcell 3.0 Filter equipped in Primary Modcell 3.0

Growth 1 frame

Dual Duplex filter DualDuplexer

4 Determine the RX1 Digital Shelf value.

IF the RX1 port is connected to …

… AND “RX1 FP Type” is …

THEN set “RX1 Digital Shelf” to …

No Filter (or is not used) NoFilterPanel Local

Modcell 3.0 Primary

DualDuplexer Primary Filters in the Primary cabinet

NoFilterPanel Local

Filters in the Growth1 cabinet (any setting) Growth-1

Filters in the Growth 2 cabinet (any setting) Growth-2

Filters in the Growth 3 cabinet (any setting) Growth-3

5 Set RX1 Filter Shelf to 1.

Continued on next page

Page 230: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 228 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data RX1 Radio Settings (continued)

Step Action

6 Determine the RX1 Filter Panel value.

IF the Radio’s RX1 port is connected to …

… AND a CLGC Ethernet Hub is …

THEN set “RX1 Filter Panel” to…

Filters in the same frame N/A 1 – 6 (for 3 Sector) 1 – 12 (for 6 Sector)

Equipped 1 – 6 Filters in a different frame

Not Equipped 0

No Filter (or is not used) N/A 0

NOTE: Use the filter number where the Radio’s RX1 port is connected. Trace the cables from the Radio RX1 port to the filter.

7 Set RX1 RF Path to 1.

8 Set RX1 EAC to Rear EAC.

9 Determine the RX1 FP Connector value.

IF the RX1 port of the Radio is connected to …

THEN set “RX1 FP Connector” to…

No filter (or is not used) J4/J24

The J4 or J24 port (any filter type, in any frame)

J4/J24

The J5 or J25 port (any filter type, in any frame)

J5/J25

The J6 or J26 port (any filter type, in any frame)

J6/J26

10 Proceed to Common Data RX2 Radio Settings on page 229.

Continued on next page

Page 231: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 229 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data RX2 Radio Settings

Follow this procedure to determine the RX2 settings for each radio.

Step Action

1 Determine the RX2 B2 Cal value.

IF the Radio’s RX2 port is connected to …

THEN set RX1 B2 Cal Loss to …

Dual Duplex Filter 1.5*

All other filter type or No equipped filter

5.0*

*NOTE: RMT populates the B2 value during Off-Line RMT Calibration procedures. RMT populates the B2 value based on frequency band as well as filter type. The values above are just nominal values.

2 Determine the RX2 Antenna value.

IF the frame is … … AND the Radio’s RX2 port is connected to …

THEN set “RX2 Antenna” to …

Diversity 1 Filter in Slot 1, 2, or 3 (Filter 2, 4, or 6)

2 Modcell 4.0B Primary (with Intelligent Antenna Calibration Unit (IACU)) Diversity 1 Filter in Slot 4, 5, or 6

(Filter 8, 10, or 12) 4

Modcell 4.0B PCS Growth-1 (with IACU equipped in the M4.0B 850 Primary Frame)

Diversity 1 Filter in Slot 1, 2, or 3 (Filter 2, 4, or 6)

6

No Filter (or is not used) 1

Diversity 0 Filter in a Primary frame

1

Diversity 1 Filter in a Primary frame

2

Diversity 0 Filter in a Growth 1, 2 or 3 frame

3

Any other cabinet type

Diversity 1 Filter in a Growth 1, 2, or 3 frame

4

NOTE: The RX2 port may not be connected directly to a filter. In some cases it connects to a splitter that connects to a filter (this occurs when there are more than 3 radios per sector).

Continued on next page

Page 232: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 230 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data RX2 Radio Settings (continued)

Step Action

3 Determine RX2 FP Type setting.

IF the Radio is in a …

… AND RX2 port is connected to …

THEN set “RX2 FP Type” to…

No Filter (or is not used) NoFilterPanel

Modcell 3.0 Filter Modcell3.0

Primary frame

Dual Duplex Filter DualDuplexer

No Filter (or is not used) NoFilterPanel

Filter not equipped in the same cabinet (See NOTE)

NoFilterPanel

Modcell 3.0 Filter equipped in the same cabinet Modcell 3.0

Growth 1, 2, or 3 frame

A Dual Duplexer Filter equipped in the same cabinet DualDuplexer

No Filter (or is not used) NoFilterPanel

Modcell 3.0 Filter equipped in Primary Modcell 3.0

Growth 1 frame

Dual Duplexer DualDuplexer

4 Determine the RX2 Digital Shelf value.

IF the RX2 port is connected to …

… AND “RX2 FP Type” is …

THEN set “RX2 Digital Shelf” to …

No Filter (or is not used) NoFilterPanel Local

Modcell 3.0 Primary

DualDuplexer Primary Filters in the Primary cabinet

NoFilterPanel Local

Filters in the Growth1 cabinet (any setting) Growth-1

Filters in the Growth 2 cabinet (any setting) Growth-2

Filters in the Growth 3 cabinet (any setting) Growth-3

5 Set the RX2 Filter Shelf to 1.

Continued on next page

Page 233: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 231 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Common Data RX2 Radio Settings (continued)

Step Action

6 Determine the RX2 Filter Panel value.

IF the Radio’s RX2 port is connected to …

… AND a CLGC Ethernet Hub is …

THEN set “RX2 Filter Panel” to…

Filters in the same frame N/A 1 – 12

Equipped 1 – 6 Filters in a different frame

Not Equipped 0

No Filter (or is not used) N/A 0

NOTE: Use the filter number where the Radio’s RX2 port is connected. Trace the cables from the Radio RX2 port to the filter.

7 Set RX2 RF Path to 1.

8 Set RX2 EAC to Rear EAC.

9 Determine the RX2 FP Connector value.

IF the RX2 port of the Radio is connected to …

THEN set “RX2 FP Connector” to…

No filter (or is not used) J4/J24

The J4 or J24 port (any filter type, in any frame)

J4/J24

The J5 or J25 port (any filter type, in any frame)

J5/J25

The J6 or J26 port (any filter type, in any frame)

J6/J26

10 Proceed to Update LAM Parameters on next page.

Continued on next page

Page 234: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 232 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Update LAM Parameters

Follow this procedure below to configure the LAM Parameters.

Step Action

1 Select LAM Parms.

Figure 86: LAM Parms Screen (example)

Continued on next page

Page 235: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 233 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Update LAM Parameters (continued)

Step Action

2 Determine the TX1 Targ Pwr Offset value.

IF the cell is ... THEN use ...

An IBS Compact 4.0 Refer to the IBS COMPACT 4.0 TARGET POWER OFFSET procedures on page 243.

A Base Station 8420 Refer to BASE STATION 8420 TARGET POWER OFFSET procedures on page 245.

A Base Station 2400 (without Amp)

Refer to the BASE STATION 2400 (WITHOUT AMP) TARGET POWER OFFSET procedures on page 246.

700 MHZ Compact 4.0B - 0.97

Any other configuration 0

3 Set TX1 LAM1 DSN through TX1 LAM6 DSN to 0.

4 Determine the values for: TX1 Lam1 LUN TX1 Lam2 LUN TX1 Lam3 LUN

IF the Radio’s TX1 port is connected to … THEN use …

Hatch Plate (or is not used)

TX1 Lam1 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam2 LUN = 0xff TX1 Lam3 LUN = 0xff

Flexent Amplifier (No Splitter)

TX1 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number Tx1 Lam2 LUN = 0xff Tx1 Lam3 LUN = 0xff

Flexent Amplifier through a 1:2 Splitter

TX1 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX1 Lam2 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number Tx1 Lam3 LUN = 0xff

Flexent Amplifier through a 1:3 Splitter

TX1 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX1 Lam2 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX1 Lam3 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number

NOTE: Logical Amplifier Numbering may not equal the Physical Amplifier location. Refer to the “Configuration Aid” (CA 100) document for specific information on Physical and Logical Amplifier Numbering for common configurations.

Continued on next page

Page 236: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 234 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Update LAM Parameters (continued)

Step Action

5 Set the following to 0xff: TX1 Lam4 LUN TX1 Lam5 LUN TX1 Lam6 LUN

6 Set the TX2 Target Pwr Offset to 0.

7 Set TX2 LAM1 DSN through TX2 LAM6 DSN to 0.

8 Determine the values for: TX2 Lam1 LUN TX2 Lam2 LUN TX2 Lam3 LUN

IF the Radio’s TX2 port is connected to … THEN use …

Hatch Plate (or is not used)

TX2 Lam1 LUN = 0xff TX2 Lam2 LUN = 0xff TX2 Lam3 LUN = 0xff

Flexent Amplifier (No Splitter)

TX2 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number Tx2 Lam2 LUN = 0xff Tx2 Lam3 LUN = 0xff

Flexent Amplifier through a 1:2 Splitter

TX2 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX2 Lam2 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number Tx2 Lam3 LUN = 0xff

Flexent Amplifier through a 1:3 Splitter

TX2 Lam1 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX2 Lam2 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number TX2 Lam3 LUN = Logical Amplifier Number

NOTE: Logical Amplifier Numbering may not equal the Physical Amplifier location. Refer to the “Configuration Aid” (CA 100) document for specific information on Physical and Logical Amplifier Numbering for common configurations.

9 Set the following to 0xff: TX2 Lam4 LUN TX2 Lam5 LUN TX2 Lam6 LUN

10 Proceed to Misc. Parameters on page 235.

Continued on next page

Page 237: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 235 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Misc. Parameters Follow this procedure to set the Miscellaneous Parameters.

Step Action

1 Select Misc Parms.

Figure 87: Misc Parms Screen (example)

2 Determine the TX1 Conv UN value.

IF the radio is ... … AND if TX1 port is being used on …

THEN set ...

Radio 1 1

Radio 2 2

Radio 3 3

Radio 4 4

Radio 5 5

An 850 UCR in a Korean 4.0 cell

Radio 6 6

Any other radio and/or cell configuration

N/A 0xff

NOTE: This field is only applicable to Korean 4.0 cells. For all other cell types, including the Korean Modcell 4.0B, this field is set to the default value of 0xff. (Even though initial 700 MHZ Compact4.0 cells have transmit converters, the default value of 0xff is used)

Continued on next page

Page 238: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 236 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Misc. Parameters (continued)

Step Action

3 Determine the TX2 Conv UN value.

IF the cell is ... … AND if TX2 port is being used on …

THEN use ...

Radio 1 4

Radio 2 5

An 850 UCR in a Korean 4.0 cell

Radio 3 6

Any other radio and/or cell configuration

N/A 0xff

NOTE: This field is only applicable to Korean 4.0 cell. For all other cell types, including the Korean Modcell 4.0B, this field is set to the default value of 0xff.

4 Set RX1 Conv UN to 0xff.

5 Set RX2 Conv UN to 0xff.

6 Set TX1 MCA DS Gain to 0.0.

7 Set TX2 MCA DS Gain to 0.0.

8 Set PAF to NoPafEntered.

Continued on next page

Page 239: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 237 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Misc. Parameters (continued)

Step Action

9 Determine the Ant Test MU Type values.

IF Radio is ... … AND … THEN use ...

TDU 1 is not equipped NotEquipped

TDU 1 is equipped in the same frame RfTestUnit

TDU 1 is equipped in a different frame and a CLCG Ethernet Hub is installed

RfTestUnit

UCR (See NOTE)

TDU 1 is equipped in a different frame and a CLCG Ethernet Hub is not installed

NotEquipped

MCR in BS-8420 without filters

N/A NotEquipped

MCR in BS-2400 (without Amp)

N/A NotEquipped

Filters are in the same frame Radio MCR (in any other base station) Filters are in a different frame NotEquipped

UCR450 N/A FilterPanel

Not equipped N/A NotEquipped

NOTE: TDU 1 Equipage and Numbering: For UCRs, the Filter will be in the same frame as the TDU. To determine TDU 1 equipage, verify that the TDU 1 is connected to the same filters used by the UCRs.

Continued on next page

Page 240: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 238 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Misc. Parameters (continued)

Step Action

10 Determine the Ant Test MU LUN values.

IF the “Ant Test MU Type” is set to …

… AND … THEN set “Ant Test MU LUN” to…

TDU1 in Primary 1

TDU 1 in Growth 1 5

RFTestUnit

TDU 1 in Growth 2 9

Radio is 1 1

Radio is 2 2

Radio is 3 3

Radio is 4 4

Radio is 5 5

Radio and the cell is a Base Station 8401 or Base Station 8420

Radio is 6 6

Radio is 1 or 4 1

Radio is 2 or 5 2

Radio in any other cell

Radio is 3 or 6 3

Radio is 1 1

Radio is 2 2

FilterPanel

Radio is 3 3

NotEquipped N/A NotEquipped

Continued on next page

Page 241: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 239 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Misc. Parameters (continued)

Step Action

11 Determine the CLGC MU Type value.

IF Radio is ... … AND … THEN use ...

TDU 2 is not equipped NotEquipped

TDU 2 is equipped in the same frame RfTestUnit

TDU 2 is equipped in a different frame and a CLCG Ethernet Hub is installed

RfTestUnit

A UCR (See NOTE)

TDU 2 is equipped in a different frame and a CLCG Ethernet Hub is not installed

NotEquipped

An MCR in a BS-8420 without filters

N/A NotEquipped

MCR in BS-2400 (without Amp)

N/A NotEquipped

Filters are in the same frame Radio

Filters are in a different frame and TX path is NOT supported by CLGC Ethernet hub

NotEquipped

An MCR in any other base station

Filters are in a different frame and TX path is supported by CLGC Ethernet hub

Radio

A UCR450 N/A Radio

Not equipped N/A NotEquipped

Continued on next page

Page 242: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 240 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Misc. Parameters (continued)

Step Action

12 Determine the CLCG MU LUN values.

IF the “CLCG MU Type” is set to …

… AND … THEN set “CLCG MU LUN” to…

TDU 2 in Primary 2

TDU 2 in Growth 1 6

RFTestUnit

TDU 2 in Growth 2 10

Radio is 1 1

Radio is 2 2

Radio is 3 3

Radio is 4 4

Radio is 5 5

Radio

Radio is 6 6

NotEquipped N/A NotEquipped

13 Set DPD MU Type to Not Equipped.

14 Set DPD MU LUN to Not Equipped.

15 Set PPM MU Type to Not Equipped.

16 Set PPM MU LUN to Not Equipped.

17 Proceed to Apply BTS Primary RF Path Map Settings on page 241.

Continued on next page

Page 243: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 241 November, 2007

MODCELL BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Apply BTS Primary RF Path Map Settings

Follow this procedure to apply the BTS Primary RF Path Map settings. CAUTION: When writing data files to the backplane, any calibration values defined in the existing port map may be over written. See Save Original BTS Primary RF Path Map on page 213 for details on saving existing data. CAUTION: Applying BTS Primary RF Path Map may require Re-calibrating the cell. See Step 4 below.

Step Action

1 Click Apply from the BTS Primary RF Path Map Window.

IF ... THEN ...

More that 1 URC is present in the frame.

Proceed to Step 2.

Only 1 URC is present in the frame Proceed to Step 3.

2 Click Confirm in the Synchronized EEPROM Write window.

NOTE: RMT checks for the existence of other equipped URCs and prompt the user to update the backplane. Verify that all equipped URCs are shown and checked (√).

3 Click Cancel in the BTS Primary RF Path Map window.

4 Proceed with the Final…….

Page 244: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 242 November, 2007

SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE

Save Settings Follow the procedure below to create a new folder and to save settings (i.e. xml file) to the

newly created folder.

Step Action

1 Click Save under the Configuration File box.

2 Click the down arrow and select the Local Disk (C:) drive.

3 Create a new folder by clicking the Create New Folder Icon

4 Type a name for the folder and hit Enter. This folder can then be used to store all of the UTD, BTS Primary RF Path Map, and BTS RF Test Path Map xml files that are saved. For example you can name the folder “XML Files”.

5 Double Click the folder just created in Step 4.

6 Enter the desired filename in the File name box.

Example

Cell 350 Radio Path Map.xml

7 Click Save in the “Save As” window.

8 After the file is saved a window appears “The operation completed successfully”. Click OK in this window.

Page 245: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 243 November, 2007

IBS COMPACT 4.0 TARGET POWER OFFSET

TX1/TX2 Targ Pwr Offset Fields

This Appendix describes the applications where the “TX1 Targ Pwr Offset” and “TX2 Targ Pwr Offset” BTS Primary RF Path Map fields are non-zero. In almost all applications these fields should be 0. However there are a few In-Building Low Power applications of the Compact 4.0 where these fields must be non-zero. CAUTION: These fields are set in the factory and should not be changed unless it is certain that they must be changed due to reconfiguration, etc.

Compact 4.0 Configuration Overview

The many different configurations of the Compact 4.0 can be grouped into three categories: Standard Configuration, In-Building System (IBS), and Hot Spot. IBS configurations are typically used for in-building low power per carrier applications. IBS configurations do not have receive diversity. IBS cells only use one RF output port. IBS cells use Max Power and CBR Attenuation values that do not reflect the actual output power at the antenna connector. For example, cells not equipped with amplifiers are IBS cells. In-building cells typically have splitters and combiners. Just because a cell is located indoors that does not make it an IBS configuration. Cells that are configured for a “Hot Spot” application are typically multi carrier low output power per carrier cells. Hot Spot cells do have receive diversity. Hot Spot configurations have an RF output power of 5W per carrier for 850 cells. For Hot Spot cells the “TX1 Targ Pwr Offset” and “TX2 Targ Pwr Offset” BTS Primary RF Path Map fields are 0.0. Any Compact that is not configured for IBS or Hot Spot applications is considered a Standard Configuration. All Standard Configuration Compact 4.0 cells must have the “TX1 Targ Pwr Offset” and “TX2 Targ Pwr Offset” BTS Primary RF Path Map fields set to 0.0.

TX1/TX2 Targ Pwr Offset

See the table below for possible values of the TX1 and TX2 Targ Pwr Offset.

Output Power per Carrier / Bandclass TX1 Targ Pwr Offset &

TX2 Targ Pwr Offset Values

5 Watts / Cellular 6.02

2.5 dBm / Cellular This configuration has no amplifiers and does not have a combiner or a splitter and is for 1-3 carrier cells

40.51

-1 dBm / Cellular This configuration has no amplifiers and is equipped with a 2:1 combiner and a 1:2 splitter and is for 4-6 carrier cells

44.01

-3dBm / Cellular This configuration has no amplifiers and is equipped with a 3:1 combiner and a 1:3 splitter and is for 7 carrier cells

46.01

NOTE: These are IBS configurations: single sector cells with 1 RF Output (i.e. only 1 antenna is connected to the cell)

Continued on next page

Page 246: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 244 November, 2007

IBS COMPACT 4.0 TARGET POWER OFFSET, Continued

TX1/TX2 Targ Pwr Offset (continued)

Output Power per Carrier / Bandclass TX1 Targ Pwr Offset & TX2 Targ Pwr Offset Values

4 Watts / PCS 6.02

2.5 dBm / PCS This configuration has no amplifiers and does not have a combiner or a splitter and is for 1-3 carrier cells

39.54

-1.5 dBm / PCS This configuration has no amplifiers and is equipped with a 2:1 combiner and 1:2 splitter and is for 4-6 carrier cells

43.54

-3.5 dBm / PCS This configuration has no amplifiers and is equipped with a 3:1 combiner and 1:3 splitter and is for 7 carrier cells

45.54

NOTE: These are IBS Configurations: single sector cells with 1 RF Output (i.e. only 1 antenna is connected to the cell)

Page 247: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 245 November, 2007

BASE STATION 8420 TARGET POWER OFFSET

TX1/TX2 Targ Pwr Offset Fields

This Appendix describes the applications where the “TX1 Targ Pwr Offset” and “TX2 Targ Pwr Offset” BTS Primary RF Path Map fields are non-zero. In almost all applications these fields should be 0. However the Base Station 8420 requires these fields to be non-zero. CAUTION: These fields are set in the factory and should not be changed unless it is certain that they must be changed due to reconfiguration, etc.

TX1/TX2 Targ Pwr Offset

See the table below for possible values of the TX1 and TX2 Targ Pwr Offset.

Base Station 8420 Configuration Band Class TX1/TX2 Target Power Offset

850 43.01 No Amplifiers

PCS 42.04

850 10.0 Filters Equipped, Amplifiers Equipped (With 10 dB Attenuator) PCS 9.0

850 0.0 Filters Equipped, Amplifiers Equipped (Without 10 dB Attenuator) PCS 0.0

NOTE: The 10 dB Attenuator, if equipped, is located on the amplifier’s RF IN port.

Page 248: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 246 November, 2007

BASE STATION 2400 (WITHOUT AMP) TARGET POWER OFFSET

TX1 Targ Pwr Offset Fields

This Appendix describes the applications where the “TX1 Targ Pwr Offset” BTS Primary RF Path Map fields are non-zero. In almost all applications these fields should be 0. However the Base Station 2400 (without Amp) requires these fields to be non-zero. CAUTION: These fields are set in the factory and should not be changed unless it is certain that they must be changed due to reconfiguration, etc.

TX1 Targ Pwr Offset

See the table below for possible values of the TX1 Targ Pwr Offset.

Base Station 2400 (without Amp) Configuration

Band Class TX1 Target Power Offset

850 43.01 No Amplifiers

PCS 42.04

Page 249: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 247 November, 2007

CHANGING PORT MAP VERSIONS

Changing Version Numbers

Follow the procedures below to change the UCR RF Port Map version for all equipped URCs. NOTE: The CSU/ATM Parameters, BTS RF Test Path Map, and BTS Primary RF Path Map all have the “Advanced” button at the bottom of the screen. The advanced button is used to view the “Advanced Serial Memory Parameters” screen. Follow the procedures below to change the UCR RF Port Map version.

Step Action

1 In the BTS Primary RF Path Map, select Advanced at the bottom of the screen. NOTE: Refer to Figure 72 on page 165.

2 Change the Record Version to 1.

3 Click Apply in “Advanced Serial Memory Record Parameters” screen

4 Click Yes in the “Are you sure??” window.

Continued on next page

Page 250: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 248 November, 2007

CHANGING PORT MAP VERSIONS, Continued

Changing Version Numbers (continued)

Step Action

5 Click Cancel “Advanced Serial Memory Record Parameters” screen

6 Click Apply from the BTS Primary RF Path Map Window.

IF ... THEN ...

More that 1 URC is present in the frame.

Proceed to Step 7.

Only 1 URC is present in the frame Proceed to Step 8.

7 Click Confirm in the Synchronized EEPROM Write window.

NOTE: RMT checks for the existence of other equipped URCs and prompt the user to update the backplane. Verify that all equipped URCs are shown and checked (√).

Page 251: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 249 November, 2007

FINAL PROCEDURES

Test Cleanup/ Final Procedures

Follow the procedure below for test cleanup procedures.

Step Action

1 Click DISCONNECT on the RMT screen.

2 Click File → Exit.

3 Remove all test equipment connections from the HD 4.0/4.0B. For example, remove the crossover cable.

4 Reconnect the T1/E1, if necessary.

5 Determine the method to power cycle the digital shelf.

IF maintaining GPS lock is ...

THEN ...

Required Reseat all equipped URCs NOTE: Ensure that URC screws are loosened before reseating the packs.

Not required Reset the Digital Shelf circuit breakers. NOTE: Refer to Figure 88 below.

6 Secure the cabinet door.

Figure 88: IOU Digital Shelf Circuit Breaker

Page 252: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 250 November, 2007

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 253: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 251 November, 2007

BTS RF TEST PATH MAP BACKPLANE PARAMETERS

RMT 29.0 Job Aid Section JA500

GENERAL INFORMATION

Purpose This section describes procedures for verifying and setting BTS RF Test Path Map backplane parameters. The BTS RF Test Path Maps are verified and set using RMT and are accessed via the RMT pull-down menu (as shown below):

In conjunction with the on-line RMT HELP menu, the following procedures will aid the user in verifying and setting these backplane parameters. The following procedures are provided in this section:

Section/Description

Section JA510 - Verifying and Setting BTS Primary RF Path Map on page 253

Page 254: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 252 November, 2007

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 255: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 253 November, 2007

BTS RF Test Path Map Backplane Parameters

Section JA510 - Verifying and Setting BTS Primary RF Path Map

GENERAL

Section Description

This section describes procedures for verifying and setting the BTS RF Test Path Map backplane parameters for the following platforms:

• HD 4.0/4.0B • HD 4.0 Dual-Band • HD 4.0B Growth 1 • Base Station 8440-D • Base Station 8440-HD • Base Station 8440-M4 • Modcell 4.0/4.0B • Compact 4.0/4.0B • Base Station 2400 • Base Station 4400 • Base Station 8401 • Base Station 8420 • 850MHz Compact RU/BU • 450MHz Standard Compact • 450MHz Compact RU/BU

The BTS RF Test Path Map is verified and set using the Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT). It is assumed that the cell equipment has already been integrated and is in-service, meaning the RF Test Path Map was properly configured at the time of integration. The procedures specified herein are to be performed if problems occur during the operation of the cell equipment or when updates need to be made to the existing RF Test Path Map. The BTS RF Test Path Map parameters can be reviewed either on-line or off-line via the RMT connection. It is highly recommended that whenever changes or updates are made to the backplane parameters that the cell is removed from service. Note: When creating or modifying .xml files always save a copy of the file to the appropriate directory folder on your computer.

Page 256: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 254 November, 2007

FACILITIES DISCONNECTION

Facilities Disconnection

The connection between the switch and the cell must be removed prior to performing RMT standalone testing.

Step Action

1 Refer to the FACILITIES DISCONNECTION procedures on page 44 to remove the cell from service.

RMT INITIALIZATION

Connect with RMT

Use the following procedure to connect to the cell’s CDMA voice controller (URC) with RMT. Refer to the RMT Initialization and Startup procedures on page 17.

Step Action

1 Connect to the cell controller (URC) with RMT.

2 The updates described in this section can be performed while connected to the cell with RMT and using the Boot Generic. It is not necessary to boot to a call-processing generic to perform the procedures defined in this section.

3 Proceed as directed by the table below:

IF the cell is a … THEN … • HD 4.0/4.0B or, • HD 4.0 Dual-Band or, • HD 4.0B Growth 1 ….

Go to HD BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION on the next page.

• Base Station 8440-D or, Base Station 8440-HD or,

• Base Station 8440—M4….

Go to 8440 BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION on page 275.

• Modcell 4.0 • Compact 4.0 • 850MHz Compact RU/BU • Base Station 4400 (w/UCRs)

Go to MODCELL 4.0 BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION on page 289.

• Modcell 4.0B • Compact 4.0B • Base Station 4400 (w/MCRs) • Base Station 4401 • Base Station 8401 • Base Station 8420 • Base Station 2400 • 450MHz Std Compact • 450MHz Compact RU/BU

Go to MODCELL 4.0B BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION on page 309.

Page 257: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 255 November, 2007

HD BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION

Section Description

This section describes the procedures to verify and update the BTS RF Test Path Map on the following products:

High Density (HD) 4.0 or High Density (HD) 4.0B connected to: o S2 LAF frame o Pre-R29 BS 8440-A frame (MCPA) (without filters)

Pre-R29 8440-A (without filters) configurations are defined as configurations where the S2 LAF frame has been replaced with an 8440-A frame but the digital shelf has not been reconfigured to support the R29 interface between the digital shelf and the 8440-A frame.

o Pre-R29 BS 8440-A frame (MCPA) (with filters) Pre-R29 8440-A (with filters) configurations are defined as

configurations where the S2 LAF and AIF frames have been replaced with an 8440-A frame with filters but the digital shelf has not been reconfigured to support the R29 interface between the digital shelf and the 8440-A frame.

Pre-R29 Cell Generic Note: Pre-R29 configurations can operate on R29 and later cell generics but are not considered “R29 8440 configurations” until the lineup has been reconfigured to support the R29 interface between the digital shelf and the 8440-A frame.

Updating the BTS RF Test Path Map requires the use of the Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT). The procedures specified herein are to be performed if:

Updates are needed to the existing backplane parameters (i.e. during carrier growth, or pre R29 8440-A installation, or radio growth scenarios);

Problems occur during the integration process of the cell equipment.

Do Not Use This Section for R29 8440 Configurations

This section cannot be used to update the BTS Primary RF Path Map on R29 8440 configurations. Go to 8440 BTS PRIMARY RF PATH MAP CONFIGURATION on page 189 to program the BTS Primary RF Path Map for these configurations:

R29 8440 Configurations are defined as lineups that support the R29 interface between the digital shelf and the 8440-A frame.

R29 8440 Configurations include the following lineups: o 8440-D o 8440-HD o 8440-M4

When to Update the BTS RF Test Path Map

BTS RF Test Path Maps are set in the factory based on the cabinet configuration and equipage. If problems are experienced during the integration efforts related to the BTS RF Test Path Map and/or when field changes are made to the cabinet, use the following procedures to update the path map information. This section gives instructions for populating each field of the BTS RF Test Path Map.

Configuration Aid Document (CA 100)

The procedures outlined in this section are supported with the .xml files packaged in the Configuration Aid (CA 100) document. The CA 100 document is available through the Alcatel-Lucent Customer Information Center (CIC) – see CONFIGURATION AID (CA100) INSTALLATION on page 14 for information on accessing and loading this document. The CA 100 document includes:

The various cell configurations, Applicable RF power calibration sections, and Packaged XML files.

Continued on next page

Page 258: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 256 November, 2007

HD BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Test Equipment Information

The following provides test equipment information that pertains to the HD 4.0/4.0B configurations.

TDU Numbering

Currently a frame with UCRs (5 MHz Radio) can be equipped with the TDU 1 and TDU 2. TDU 1 is used for antenna tests while TDU 2 is used for Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC). RMT does not reference TDU in the same manner as ECP Database translations. See the table below. This Handbook section follows the RMT convention and refers to the TDU in a frame as TDU 1 or TDU 2.

Frame RMT Reference Database Translation Reference Function

1 1 Antenna Test Primary

2 2 CLGC

Growth #1 Not Applicable. TDU is not support in an HD Growth 1 frame.

TDU Connections TDU 1 connects to the J2 & J3 ports for Duplex and Triplex filters. TDU 2 connects to the external coupler on the J8 or J9 port of the Duplex and Triplex filters.

MCR Connections

For the HD RF paths, the MCR connects to a Dual Duplex Filter (MCRs transmitting through a Modcell 3.0 Filter is not supported). The MCR supports both Antenna Test and Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC). The following ports on the MCR are used for these functions:

MCR Port Dual Duplex Filter Connection Function

RC1 J11 CLGC

(for Tx1 port)

RC2 J31 CLGC

(for Tx2 port)

TONE J41 Antenna Test NOTE: The MCR can also connect to the HD Combiner Attenuator Unit (CAU). In this case, the MCR is transmitting through the SII LAC or pre-R29 BS 8440A (MCPA). CLGC is not supported for MCRs connected to a CAU and Antenna Tests are executed by the SII RTU (if equipped).

Continued on next page

Page 259: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 257 November, 2007

HD BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

General Information

Save the original RF Test Path Map .xml files because they may be needed for “back-out” purposes. Follow this procedure to save the following files:

Original TDU RF Test Path Map and Original Radio RF Test Path Map.

Save Original TDU RF Test Path Map

Follow the procedure below to save the original TDU RF Test Path Map data on the BTS RF Test Path Map window.

Step Action

1 Click Config → RF Calibration → BTS RF Test Path Map from the main RMT window. The BTS RF Test Path Map window will appear as shown below:

Figure 89: TDU RF Test Path Map Tab

2 Verify that the TDU RF Test Path Map tab is selected as shown in Figure 89 above.

Continued on next page

TDU RF Test Path Maps Tab URC to Update Box

Page 260: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 258 November, 2007

HD BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Save Original TDU RF Test Path Map (continued)

Step Action

3 Select the appropriate URC ID.

IF saving ... THEN set “Select the URC you want to update” to …

URC 1 1

URC 2 2

URC 3 3

4 Click Save in the Configuration File Box.

5 Type the filename as shown below and save it to a directory as desired. Cell X Original TDU RF Test Where: X = Cell Number NOTES:

Refer to SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE on page 329 for procedures to create a directory to store files.

When saving an xml file from the TDU RF Test Path Map tab, all TDU configuration data is saved (TDUs 1-4).

6 Click Save in the Save As Box.

7 Proceed to the procedure Save Original Radio RF Test Path Map on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 261: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 259 November, 2007

HD BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Save Original Radio RF Test Path Map

Follow the procedure below to save the original Radio RF Test Path Map data on the BTS RF Test Path Map window.

Step Action

1 From the BTS RF Test Path Map window, click on the Radio RF Test Path Map tab. See below.

Figure 90: Radio RF Test Path Map Tab

2 Select the appropriate URC ID.

IF saving ... THEN set “Select the URC you want to update” to …

URC 1 1

URC 2 2

URC 3 3

Continued on next page

Radio RF Test Path Map Tab URC to Update

Page 262: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 260 November, 2007

HD BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Save Original Radio RF Test Path Map (continued)

Step Action

3 Click Save in the Configuration File Box.

4 Type the filename as shown below and save it to a directory as desired. Cell X Original MCR RF Test Where X = Cell Number NOTES:

Refer to SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE on page 329 for procedures to create a directory to store files.

When saving an xml file from the Radio RF Test Path Map tab, all MCR configuration data is saved (MCR 1 through MCR 6)

5 Proceed to HD TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB on the next page.

Page 263: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 261 November, 2007

HD TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB

Configure TDU1 Port Map

Follow this procedure to configure and update TDU1 RF Port Map.

Step Action

1 Verify that the TDU RF Test Path Map tab is selected as shown in Figure 91 below.

Figure 91: TDU 1 – BTS RF Test Path Window

2 Set TDU Number to 1.

3 Set the Equipped field (located below tab) as shown below:

IF TDU 1 is … THEN …

Equipped a) Place a check mark (√ ) in the Equipped field (top left of window)

b) Proceed to Step 4 on the next page.

Not Equipped

a) Uncheck the Equipped field b) Proceed to the procedure Configure

TDU2 Port Map on page 266.

Continued on next page

TDU Number TDU RF Test Path Map Tab

Page 264: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 262 November, 2007

HD TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued

Configure TDU1 Port Map (continued)

Step Action

4 Set External RFS Cable Input to None.

5 In the Test Unit Location box, set the Digital Shelf to 1.

6 In the Test Unit Location box, set the Filter Shelf to 1.

7 In the Test Unit Location box, set Slot Number to 1.

8 Beginning with TDU 1 Port Number 1, trace the cable to the connection on the filter.

9 Follow the table below to determine Sector setting:

IF TDU1 Port is connected to …

… AND Equipped in filter slot …

THEN set “Sector” to …

1 or 2 Alpha

3 or 4 Beta Modcell 3.0 Filter

5 or 6 Gamma

1 Alpha,Alpha

2 Beta,Beta Dual Duplex Filter

3 Gamma,Gamma

No Filter N/A _NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 92, on the next page, for an example of filter slot numbering.

10 Follow the table below to determine Antenna setting:

IF TDU1 Port is connected to …

… AND the Diversity number is …

THEN set “Antenna” to ...

Diversity 0 1 Modcell 3.0 Filter

Diversity 1 2

Dual Duplex Filter N/A 1,2

No Filter N/A _NC_

Continued on next page

Page 265: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 263 November, 2007

HD TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued

Configure TDU1 Port Map (continued)

AlphaDiv 0

Filter1

J8

J9

AlphaDiv 1

Filter2

J8

J9

BetaDiv 0

Filter3

J8

J9

BetaDiv 1

Filter4

J8

J9

GammaDiv 0

Filter5

J8

J9

GammaDiv 1

Filter6

J8

J9

Duplex or Triplex Modcell 3.0 Filter Panels

Dual Duplex Filter Panels

(3 Sector)

NOTE: Trace the cables from the TDU or MCR Port to the Filter. Filters are numbered 1 through 6 (from left to right) regardless if they are in a primary or growth frame. Also note that each Dual-Duplex filter has two “Filter Panels” associated with it.

Alpha

Filter 1 Filter 2Div 0 Div 1J8 J28

Beta

Filter 3 Filter 4Div 0 Div 1J8 J28

Gamma

Filter 5 Filter 6Div 0 Div 1J8 J28

Slot 1

Slot 1

Slot 6Slot 2 Slot 4Slot 3 Slot 5

Slot 2 Slot 3

Figure 92: Filter Numbering

Continued on next page

Page 266: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 264 November, 2007

HD TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued

Configure TDU1 Port Map (continued)

Step Action

11 Follow the table below to determine Filter Type setting:

IF TDU1 Port is connected to ... THEN set “Filter Type” to ...

Modcell 3.0 Filter Modcell3.0

Dual Duplex Filter DualDuplexer

No Filter NoFilterPanel

12 Follow the table below to determine Coupler Type setting:

IF TDU1 Port is connected to ... THEN set “Coupler Type” to ...

J3 Connector of a Modcell 3.0 Filter Incident

J2 Connector of a Modcell 3.0 Filter Reflected

J41 Connector of a Dual Duplex Filter SwitchedBDT

No Filter NoCoupler

13 Follow the table below to determine Filter Number setting:

IF TDU1 Port is connected to ...

… AND the filter is in physical slot location …

THEN set “Filter Number” to …

1 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

5 5

Modcell 3.0 Filter

6 6

1 1,2

2 3,4 Dual Duplex Filter

3 5,6

No Filter N/A _NoFP_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 92, on page 263, for an example of filter slot numbering.

Continued on next page

Page 267: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 265 November, 2007

HD TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued

Configure TDU1 Port Map (continued)

Step Action

14 Follow the table below to determine FP RF Path Num setting:

IF TDU 1 Port is connected to …

… AND the following transmit ports are being

used on the filter …

THEN set “FP RF Path Num” to ...

J8 only 1

J8 and J9 1 Triplex Modcell 3.0 Filter

J9 only 2

Duplex Modcell 3.0 Filter,

Dual Duplex Filter, or

No Filter Panel

N/A 1

15 Repeat Steps 9 -14 for each remaining Port Numbers.

16 Proceed to the procedure Configure TDU2 Port Map on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 268: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 266 November, 2007

HD TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued

Configure TDU2 Port Map

Follow the procedure to update the TDU2 port map information.

Step Action

1 Set TDU Number to 2 as shown in Figure 93 below.

Figure 93: TDU 2 – BTS RF Test Path Window

2 Set the Equipped field (located below tab) as shown below:

IF TDU 1 is ... THEN ...

Equipped (See Note)

a) Place a check mark (√ ) in the Equipped field (top left of window)

b) Proceed to Step 3 on the next page.

Not Equipped a) Uncheck the Equipped field b) Proceed to HD RADIO RF TEST

PATH MAP TAB on page 270.

NOTE: TDU 2 Equipped means: The frame must contain UCRs and the radios must be using a TDU to perform Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC). Verify that the TDU is connected to the same OneBTS filters used by the UCRs.

Continued on next page

TDU Number

Page 269: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 267 November, 2007

HD TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued

Configure TDU2 Port Map (continued)

Step Action

3 Set External RFS Cable Input to None.

4 In the Test Unit Location box set the Digital Shelf to 1.

5 In the Test Unit Location box set the Filter Shelf to 1.

6 In the Test Unit Location box set Slot Number to 2.

7 Beginning with TDU 2 Port Number 1, trace the cable to the connection on the filter.

8 Follow the table below to determine Sector setting:

IF TDU2 Port is connected to …

… AND equipped in filter slot …

THEN set “Sector” to ...

1 or 2 Alpha

3 or 4 Beta Modcell 3.0 Filter

5 or 6 Gamma

1 Alpha,Alpha

2 Beta,Beta Dual Duplex Filter

3 Gamma,Gamma

No Filter N/A _NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 92, on page 263, for an example of filter slot numbering.

9 Follow the table below to determine Antenna setting:

IF TDU2 Port is connected to …

… AND using … THEN set “Antenna” to ...

Diversity 0 1 Modcell 3.0 Filter

Diversity 1 2

Port J11 1 Dual Duplex Filter

Port J31 2

No Filter N/A _NC_

10 Follow the table below to determine Filter Type setting:

IF TDU2 Port is connected to ... THEN set “Filter Type” to ...

Modcell 3.0 Filter Modcell3.0

Dual Duplex Filter DualDuplexer

No Filter NoFilterPanel

Continued on next page

Page 270: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 268 November, 2007

HD TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued

Configure TDU2 Port Map (continued)

Step Action

11 Follow the table below to determine Coupler Type setting:

IF TDU2 Port is connected to ... THEN ...

Modcell 3.0 Filter, or Dual Duplex Filter

DPD

No Filter NoCoupler

12 Follow the table below to determine Filter Number setting:

IF TDU2 Port is connected to ... THEN set “Filter Number” to …

Filter 1 1

Filter 2 2

Filter 3 3

Filter 4 4

Filter 5 5

Filter 6 6

No Filter _NoFP_

NOTE: This setting refers to the actual Filter number and NOT the physical slot number. Refer to Figure 92, on page 263, for more information on how filters are numbered.

13 Follow the table below to determine FP RF Path Num setting:

IF TDU 2 Port is connected to … THEN set “FP RF Path Num” to …

a coupler on the J9 port of a Triplex filter

2

a coupler on the J8 port of a Duplex or Triplex filter, or

any port on a Dual Duplex filter

1

14 Repeat Steps 8-14 for each Port Number.

15 Proceed to the procedure Set Radio Tab to Default on the next page.

Page 271: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 269 November, 2007

HD TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued

Set Radio Tab to Default

Follow the procedure below to set the Radio RF Test Path Map to their default values. NOTE: The HD frame will support TDUs, or MCRs, but not both. If the TDU Path Map is used, then set the MCR Tab to default values.

Step Action

1 From the BTS RF Test Path Map window, click on the Radio RF Test Path Map tab. See below.

Figure 94: Radio RF Test Path Map Tab

2 Click Recall button in the Configuration File box.

3 Navigate to the directory below and select the file in bold: C:\Program Files\Lucent Technologies\RMT\config\1bts\IEH\RF TEST PM MCR RF TEST – Unequipped.xml

4 Click Open. NOTE: If the proper file was selected the Equipped field (located below tab) should be unchecked for all Radios (1-6). See Figure 94 above.

5 Proceed to the procedure FINAL PROCEDURES on page 327.

Radio RF Test Path Map Tab Radio Number

Page 272: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 270 November, 2007

HD RADIO RF TEST PATH MAP TAB

Configure the Radio RF Test Path Map Tab

Follow the procedure to update the MCR port map information. The MCR has 3 ports: Port 1 = RC1 (Receive CLGC 1) Port 2 = RC2 (Receive CLGC 2) Port 3 = TONE (Antenna Tests)

NOTE: This procedure should only be used if MCRs are equipped in the frame and used to perform test diagnostics.

Step Action

1 From the BTS RF Test Path Map window, click on the Radio RF Test Path Map tab. See below.

Figure 95: Radio RF Test Path Map Tab

2 Select the Radio Number (start with Radio 1).

Continued on next page

Radio RF Test Path Map Tab

Equipped Field

Radio Number

Page 273: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 271 November, 2007

HD RADIO RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued

Configure the Radio RF Test Path Map Tab (continued)

Step Action

3 Set the Equipped field (located below tab) as shown below:

IF the MCR is ... … AND connected to …

THEN ...

OneBTS Amplifiers a) Place a check mark (√ ) in the Equipped field (top left of window)

b) Proceed to Step 4.

Equipped

CAU (SII LAC) a) Uncheck the Equipped field b) Proceed to Step 4.

Not Equipped N/A a) Uncheck the Equipped field b) Proceed to Step 4.

4 In the Test Unit Location box set the Digital Shelf field as shown below:

IF the MCRs are connected to filters in the ...

THEN set “Digital Shelf” to ...

Primary Cabinet 1

Growth #1 Cabinet 2

5 In the Test Unit Location box, set the Filter Shelf to 1.

6 Proceed to Radio Tab – Port 1 and Port 2 on next page.

Continued on next page

Page 274: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 272 November, 2007

HD RADIO RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued

Radio Tab – Port 1 and Port 2

Follow the procedure to update the following MCR Ports: Port 1 = RC1 (Receive CLGC 1) Port 2 = RC2 (Receive CLGC 2)

Start with Port 1 and then repeat the steps for Port 2.

Step Action

1 Trace the RC1 cable to the connection on the filter.

2 Follow the table below to determine Sector setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to a …

… AND Equipped in filter slot …

THEN set “Sector” to ...

1 Alpha

2 Beta Dual Duplex Filter

3 Gamma

No Filter N/A _NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 92, on page 263, for an example of filter slot numbering.

3 Follow the table below to determine Antenna setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to …

… AND the Diversity number is …

THEN set “Antenna” to ...

Diversity 0 1 Dual Duplex Filter in the Primary Frame Diversity 1 2

Diversity 0 3 Dual Duplex Filter in the Growth-1 Frame Diversity 1 4

No Filter N/A _NC_

4 Follow the table below to determine Filter Type setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to ... THEN set “Filter Type” to ...

Dual Duplex Filter DualDuplexer

No Filter NoFilterPanel

5 Follow the table below to determine Coupler Type setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to ... THEN set “Coupler Type” to ...

Dual Duplex Filter DPD

No Filter NoCoupler

Continued on next page

Page 275: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 273 November, 2007

HD RADIO RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued

Radio Tab – Port 1 and Port 2 (continued)

Step Action

6 Follow the table below to determine Filter Number setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to … THEN set “Filter Number” to ...

Dual Duplex Filter 1 – 6

No Filter _NC_

NOTE: Use the filter number where the Radio’s RC1/RC2 Port is connected. Refer to Figure 92, on page 263, for an example of filter slot numbering.

7 Set the FP RF Path Num to 1.

8 Trace the RC2 cable to the connection on the filter and then repeat Steps 2 – 7.

9 Proceed to MCR Tab – Port 3 below.

MCR Tab – Port 3 Follow the procedure to update the following:

Port 3 = TONE (Antenna Test)

Step Action

1 Trace the RC3 cables to the connection on the filter.

2 Follow the table below to determine Sector setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to a …

… AND Equipped in filter slot …

THEN set “Sector” to ...

1 Alpha,Alpha

2 Beta,Beta Dual Duplex Filter

3 Gamma,Gamma

No Filter N/A _NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 92, on page 263, for an example of filter slot numbering.

3 Follow the table below to determine Antenna setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to … THEN set “Antenna” to ...

Dual Duplex Filter in the Primary Frame 1,2

Dual Duplex Filter in the Growth-1 Frame 3,4

No Filter _NC_

Continued on next page

Page 276: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 274 November, 2007

HD RADIO RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued

MCR Tab – Port 3 (continued)

Step Action

4 Follow the table below to determine Filter Type setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to ... THEN set “Filter Type” to ...

Dual Duplex Filter DualDuplexer

No Filter NoFilterPanel

5 Follow the table below to determine Coupler Type setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to ... THEN set “Coupler Type” to ...

Dual Duplex Filter SwitchedBDT

No Filter NoCoupler

6 Follow the table below to determine Filter Number setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to …

… AND the filter is in slot …

THEN set “Filter Number” to ...

1 1,2

2 3,4 Dual Duplex Filter

3 5,6

No Filter N/A _NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 92, on page 263, for an example of filter slot numbering.

7 Set the FP RF Path Num to 1.

8 Repeat HD RADIO RF TEST PATH MAP TAB on page 270 (starting with Step 2) for each equipped MCR.

9 Proceed to the FINAL PROCEDURES on page 327.

Page 277: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 275 November, 2007

8440 BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION

Section Description

This section describes the procedures to verify and edit the BTS RF Test Path Map on the following products:

R29 8440 Configurations are defined as lineups that support the R29 interface between the digital shelf and the 8440-A frame.

R29 8440 Configurations include the following lineups: o 8440-D o 8440-HD o 8440-M4

Update the BTS RF Test Path Map requires the use of the Remote Maintenance Tool (RMT). The procedures specified herein are to be performed if:

Updates are needed to the existing backplane parameters (i.e. HD conversion, during carrier growth, or 8440 installation, or radio growth scenarios);

Problems occur during the integration process of the cell equipment.

When to Update the BTS RF Test Path Map

BTS RF Test Path Maps are set in the factory based on the cabinet configuration and equipage. If problems are experienced during the integration efforts related to the BTS RF Test Path Map and/or when field changes are made to the cabinet, use the following procedures to update the path map information. This section gives instructions for populating each field of the BTS RF Test Path Map.

Configuration Aid Document (CA 100)

The procedures outlined in this section are supported with the .xml files packaged in the Configuration Aid (CA 100) document. The CA 100 document is available through the Alcatel-Lucent Customer Information Center (CIC) – see CONFIGURATION AID (CA100) INSTALLATION on page 14 for information on accessing and loading this document. The CA 100 document includes:

• The various cell configurations, • Configuration overview, • Schematics, • Backplane programming information, • Applicable RF power calibration sections, and • Packaged XML files.

Test Equipment Information

The following provides test equipment information that pertains to the 8440 configurations.

MCR Connections

The MCR transmits through a Duplex 8440-A Filter. The MCR supports both Antenna Test and Pilot Power Measurements (PPM). The following ports on the MCR are used for these functions:

MCR Port 8440 Duplex Filter Connection Function

RC1 J41 Pilot Power Measurements

RC2 N/A N/A

TONE J41 Antenna Test NOTE: CLGC is not supported. Antenna Tests are not supported on UCRs.

Continued on next page

Page 278: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 276 November, 2007

8440 BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

General Information

Save the original RF Test Path Map .xml files because they may be needed for “back-out” purposes. Follow this procedure to save the following files:

Original TDU RF Test Path Map and Original Radio RF Test Path Map.

Save Original TDU RF Test Path Map

Follow the procedure below to save the original TDU RF Test Path Map data on the BTS RF Test Path Map window.

Step Action

1 Click Config → RF Calibration → BTS RF Test Path Map from the main RMT window. The BTS RF Test Path Map window will appear as shown below:

Figure 96: TDU RF Test Path Map Tab

2 Verify that the TDU RF Test Path Map tab is selected as shown in Figure 96 above.

Continued on next page

TDU RF Test Path Maps Tab URC to Update Box

Page 279: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 277 November, 2007

8440 BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Save Original TDU RF Test Path Map (continued)

Step Action

3 Select the appropriate URC ID.

IF saving ... THEN set “Select the URC you want to update” to …

URC 1 1

URC 2 2

URC 3 3

4 Click Save in the Configuration File Box.

5 Type the filename as shown below and save it to a directory as desired. Cell X Original TDU RF Test Where: X = Cell Number NOTES:

Refer to SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE on page 329 for procedures to create a directory to store files.

When saving an xml file from the TDU RF Test Path Map tab, all TDU configuration data is saved (TDUs 1-4).

6 Click Save in the Save As Box.

7 Proceed to the procedure Save Original Radio RF Test Path Map on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 280: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 278 November, 2007

8440 BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Save Original Radio RF Test Path Map

Follow the procedure below to save the original Radio RF Test Path Map data on the BTS RF Test Path Map window.

Step Action

1 From the BTS RF Test Path Map window, click on the Radio RF Test Path Map tab. See below.

Figure 97: Radio RF Test Path Map Tab

2 Select the appropriate URC ID.

IF saving ... THEN set “Select the URC you want to update” to …

URC 1 1

URC 2 2

URC 3 3

Continued on next page

Radio RF Test Path Map Tab URC to Update

Page 281: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 279 November, 2007

8440 BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Save Original Radio RF Test Path Map (continued)

Step Action

3 Click Save in the Configuration File Box.

4 Type the filename as shown below and save it to a directory as desired. Cell X Original MCR RF Test Where X = Cell Number NOTES:

Refer to SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE on page 329 for procedures to create a directory to store files.

When saving an xml file from the Radio RF Test Path Map tab, all MCR configuration data is saved (MCR 1 through MCR 6)

5 Proceed to Configure TDU RF Test Path Maps Tab on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 282: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 280 November, 2007

8440 BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Configure TDU RF Test Path Maps Tab

Follow the steps bellow to configure the RF Test Path Maps

Step Action

1 Click on the TDU RF Test Path Maps tab.

2 Click Recall button in the Configuration File box.

3 Navigate to the directory below and select the file in bold: C:\Program Files\Lucent Technologies\RMT\config\1bts\IEH\RF TEST PM TDU RF TEST – Unequipped.xml

4 Click Open. NOTE: If the proper file was selected the Equipped field (located below tab) should be unchecked for all TDUs (1-4). See Figure 98 below:

Figure 98: Unequipped TDU RF Test Path Map

5 Continue to Configure the Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab on the next page.

Continued on next page

Equipped Field (unchecked for TDU 1 – 4)

Page 283: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 281 November, 2007

8440 BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Configure the Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab

Follow the procedure to update the Radio RF Test Path Map information. The MCR has 3 ports:

Port 1 = RC1 (Pilot Power Measurements) Port 2 = RC2 (N/A) Port 3 = TONE (Antenna Tests)

NOTE: This procedure applies only to MCRs, if there are 850 UCRs in the frame there will not be a Radio RF Test Path Map for these radios.

Step Action

1 From the BTS RF Test Path Map window, click on the Radio RF Test Path Maps tab. See below.

Figure 99: Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab 2 Select the Radio Number (start with Radio 1).

Continued on next page

Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab

Equipped Field

Radio Number

Page 284: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 282 November, 2007

8440 BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Configure the Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab (continued)

Step Action

3 Set the Equipped field (located below tab) as shown below:

IF an MCR is... THEN ...

Equipped c) Place a check mark (√ ) in the Equipped field (top left of window)

d) Proceed to Step 4.

Not Equipped c) Uncheck the Equipped field d) Proceed to Step 4.

4 In the Test Unit Location box set the Digital Shelf field as shown below:

IF the Digital Shelf is... THEN set “Digital Shelf” to ...

850 frame 1

Single Band PCS in a Primary 8440-D 1

Dual Band PCS in the Primary 8440-D 2

PCS in Growth 1 frame 2

PCS in Growth 2 frame 3

PCS in Growth 3 frame 4

5 In the Test Unit Location box, set the Filter Shelf to 1.

6 Proceed to Radio Tab – Port 1 and Port 2 on next page.

Continued on next page

Page 285: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 283 November, 2007

8440 BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Radio Tab – Port 1 and Port 2

Follow the procedure to update the following MCR Ports: Port 1 = RC1 (Pilot Power Measurements) Port 2 = RC2 (N/A)

Port 2 is not used because the RC2 connection is not used in these configurations.

NOTE: The MCRs can be in slots 1, 2, and 3 or slots 4, 5, and 6. Only three MCRs will be cabled to the filter ports.

Step Action

1 Trace the MCR RC1 cable to the connection on the filter.

2 Follow the table below to determine Sector setting:

… IF radio port is connected to …

THEN set “Sector” to ...

Sub-rack / Filter 1 Alpha

Sub-rack / Filter 2 Beta

Sub-rack / Filter 3 Gamma

NOTE: Refer to Figure 100 on the next page for an example of filter locations.

3 Follow the table below to determine Antenna setting:

IF the frame is … … AND radio port is connected to …

THEN set “Antenna” to...

850 8440 Duplex Filter 1

PCS 8440 Duplex Filter 1

Base Station 8440 (Single Band)

No Filter (or is not used) _NC_

850 8440 Duplex Filter 1 Dual Band Base Station 8440

PCS 8440 Duplex Filter 3

Continued on next page

Page 286: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 284 November, 2007

8440 BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Figure 100: Filter Locations

Continued on next page

Gamma - Filter Shelf 3 } DX/RX Filter Panel (1 & 2)

} DX/RX Filter Panel (1 & 2)

} DX/RX Filter Panel (1 & 2) Alpha - Filter Shelf 1

Beta - Filter Shelf 2

NOTE: Simplex filters in this configuration are passive. The controllers on the Digital Shelf have no interface to these filters.

Page 287: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 285 November, 2007

8440 BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Radio Tab – Port 1 and Port 2 (continued)

Step Action

4 Follow the table below to determine Filter Type setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to ... THEN set “Filter Type” to ...

8440-A Filter McpaFP

No Filter (or is not used) NoFilterPanel 5 Follow the table below to determine Coupler Type setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to ... THEN set “Coupler Type” to ...

8440-A Filter SBDT

No Filter (or is not used) NoCoupler

6 Follow the table below to determine Filter Number setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to … THEN set “Filter Number” to...

8440-A Filter 1

No Filter (or is not used) _NoFP_

7 Set the FP RF Path Num to 1.

8 The MCR RC2 port is not being used, so continue to Step 9.

9 Proceed to the procedure Radio Tab – Port 3 on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 288: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 286 November, 2007

8440 BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Radio Tab – Port 3 Follow the procedure to update the following:

Port 3 = TONE (Antenna Test)

Step Action

1 Trace the MCR TONE cable to the connection on the filter.

2 Follow the table below to determine Sector setting:

IF radio port is connected to …

THEN set “Sector” to ...

Sub-rack / Filter 1 Alpha,Alpha

Sub-rack / Filter 2 Beta,Beta

Sub-rack / Filter 3 Gamma,Gamma

No Filter (or is not used)

_NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 100 on page 284 for an example of filter slot numbering.

3 Follow the table below to determine Antenna setting:

IF the frame is … … AND radio port is connected to …

THEN set “Antenna” to...

850 8440 Duplex Filter 1,2 Base Station 8440 (Single band)

PCS 8440 Duplex Filter in a Non-Dual Band configuration

1,2

850 8440 Duplex Filter 1,2 Base Station 8440 (Dual band)

PCS 8440 Duplex Filter in a Dual-Band Frame

3,4

Continued on next page

Page 289: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 287 November, 2007

8440 BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Radio Tab – Port 3 (continued)

Step Action

4 Follow the table below to determine Filter Type setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to ... THEN set “Filter Type” to ...

8440-A Filter McpaFP

No Filter (or is not used) NoFilterPanel

5 Follow the table below to determine Coupler Type setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to ... THEN set “Coupler Type” to ...

8440-A Filter SBDT

No Filter (or is not used) NoCoupler

6 Set the Filter Number to 1,2.

7 Set the FP RF Path Num to 1.

8 Repeat the procedure Configure the Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab on page 281 (starting with Step 2) for each equipped MCR.

9 Proceed to the FINAL PROCEDURES on page 327.

Page 290: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 288 November, 2007

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 291: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 289 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0 BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION

Section Description

This section describes the procedures to verify and edit the BTS RF Test Path Map on the following products:

Modcell 4.0 Compact 4.0 850MHz Compact RU/BU Base Station 4400 (with UCRs)

When to Update the BTS RF Test Path Map

BTS RF Test Path Maps are set in the factory based on the cabinet configuration and equipage. If problems are experienced during the integration efforts related to the BTS RF Test Path Map and/or when field changes are made to the cabinet, use the following procedures to update the path map information. This section gives instructions for populating each field of the BTS RF Test Path Map.

Configuration Aid Document (CA 100)

The procedures outlined in this section are supported with the .xml files packaged in the Configuration Aid (CA 100) document. The CA 100 document is available through the Alcatel-Lucent Customer Information Center (CIC) – see CONFIGURATION AID (CA100) INSTALLATION on page 14 for information on accessing and loading this document. The CA 100 document includes:

• The various cell configurations, • Configuration overview, • Schematics, • Backplane programming information, • Applicable RF power calibration sections, and • Packaged XML files.

Continued on next page

Page 292: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 290 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0 BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Test Equipment Information

The following provides test equipment information that pertains to the various Modcell configurations.

TDU Numbering A frame can be equipped with the two TDUs (TDU 1 and TDU 2). TDU 1 is used for antenna tests while TDU 2 is used for Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC). RMT does not reference TDUs in the same manner as ECP Database translations. See the table below. This Handbook section follows the RMT convention and refers to the TDUs in a frame as TDU 1 or TDU 2.

Frame RMT Reference Database Translation Reference Function

1 1 Antenna Test Primary

2 2 CLGC

1 5 Antenna Test Growth #1

2 6 CLGC

1 9 Antenna Test Growth #2

2 10 CLGC

Growth #3 Not Applicable. TDUs are not support in a Growth #3 frame.

TDU Connections TDU 1 connects to the J2 & J3 ports for Duplex and Triplex filters, or to the J41 port for Dual Duplex filters. TDU 2 connects to the external coupler on the filter for Duplex and Triplex filters, or to the J11 & J31 ports for Dual Duplex filters.

Continued on next page

Page 293: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 291 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0 BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

General Information

Save the original RF Test Path Map .xml files because they may be needed for “back-out” purposes. Follow this procedure to save the following files:

Original TDU RF Test Path Map and Original Radio RF Test Path Map.

Save Original TDU RF Test Path Map

Follow the procedure below to save the original TDU RF Test Path Map data on the BTS RF Test Path Map window.

Step Action

1 Click Config → RF Calibration → BTS RF Test Path Map from the main RMT window. The BTS RF Test Path Map window will appear as shown below:

Figure 101: TDU RF Test Path Map Tab

2 Verify that the TDU RF Test Path Map tab is selected as shown in Figure 101 above.

Continued on next page

TDU RF Test Path Maps Tab URC to Update Box

Page 294: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 292 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0 BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Save Original TDU RF Test Path Map (continued)

Step Action

3 Select the appropriate URC ID.

IF saving ... THEN set “Select the URC you want to update” to …

URC 1 1

URC 2 2

URC 3 3

4 Click Save in the Configuration File Box.

5 Type the filename as shown below and save it to a directory as desired. Cell X Original TDU RF Test Where: X = Cell Number NOTES:

Refer to SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE on page 329 for procedures to create a directory to store files.

When saving an xml file from the TDU RF Test Path Map tab, all TDU configuration data is saved (TDUs 1-4).

6 Click Save in the Save As Box.

7 Proceed to the procedure Save Original Radio RF Test Path Map on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 295: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 293 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0 BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Save Original Radio RF Test Path Map

Follow the procedure below to save the original Radio RF Test Path Map data on the BTS RF Test Path Map window.

Step Action

1 From the BTS RF Test Path Map window, click on the Radio RF Test Path Map tab. See below.

Figure 102: Radio RF Test Path Map Tab

2 Select the appropriate URC ID.

IF saving ... THEN set “Select the URC you want to update” to …

URC 1 1

URC 2 2

URC 3 3

Continued on next page

Radio RF Test Path Map Tab URC to Update

Page 296: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 294 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0 BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Save Original Radio RF Test Path Map (continued)

Step Action

3 Click Save in the Configuration File Box.

4 Type the filename as shown below and save it to a directory as desired. Cell X Original MCR RF Test Where X = Cell Number NOTES:

Refer to SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE on page 329 for procedures to create a directory to store files.

When saving an xml file from the Radio RF Test Path Map tab, all MCR configuration data is saved (MCR 1 through MCR 6)

5 Proceed to MODCELL TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB on the next page.

Page 297: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 295 November, 2007

MODCELL TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB

Configure TDU1 Port Map

Follow this procedure to configure and update TDU1 RF Port Map.

Step Action

1 Verify that the TDU RF Test Path Map tab is selected as shown in Figure 91 below.

Figure 103: TDU 1 – BTS RF Test Path Window

2 Set TDU Number to 1.

3 Set the Equipped field (located below tab) as shown below:

IF TDU 1 is … THEN …

Equipped c) Place a check mark (√ ) in the Equipped field (top left of window)

d) Proceed to Step 4 on the next page.

Not Equipped

c) Uncheck the Equipped field d) Proceed to the procedure Configure

TDU2 Port Map on page 300.

Continued on next page

TDU Number TDU RF Test Path Map Tab

Page 298: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 296 November, 2007

MODCELL TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued

Configure TDU1 Port Map (continued)

Step Action

4 Set External RFS Cable Input to None.

5 In the Test Unit Location box, set the Digital Shelf to 1.

6 In the Test Unit Location box, set the Filter Shelf to 1.

7 In the Test Unit Location box, set Slot Number to 1.

8 Beginning with TDU 1 Port Number 1, trace the cable to the connection on the filter.

9 Follow the table below to determine Sector setting:

IF TDU1 Port is connected to …

… AND Equipped in filter slot …

THEN set “Sector” to …

1 or 2 Alpha

3 or 4 Beta Modcell 3.0 Filter

5 or 6 Gamma

1 Alpha,Alpha

2 Beta,Beta Dual Duplex Filter

3 Gamma,Gamma

No Filter N/A _NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 104, on the next page, for an example of filter slot numbering.

10 Follow the table below to determine Antenna setting:

IF TDU1 Port is connected to …

… AND the Diversity number is …

THEN set “Antenna” to ...

Diversity 0 1 Modcell 3.0 Filter

Diversity 1 2

Dual Duplex Filter N/A 1,2

No Filter N/A _NC_

Continued on next page

Page 299: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 297 November, 2007

MODCELL TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued

Configure TDU1 Port Map (continued)

AlphaDiv 0

Filter1

J8

J9

AlphaDiv 1

Filter2

J8

J9

BetaDiv 0

Filter3

J8

J9

BetaDiv 1

Filter4

J8

J9

GammaDiv 0

Filter5

J8

J9

GammaDiv 1

Filter6

J8

J9

Duplex or Triplex Modcell 3.0 Filter Panels

Dual Duplex Filter Panels

(3 Sector)

NOTE: Trace the cables from the TDU or MCR Port to the Filter. Filters are numbered 1 through 6 (from left to right) regardless if they are in a primary or growth frame. Also note that each Dual-Duplex filter has two “Filter Panels” associated with it.

Alpha

Filter 1 Filter 2Div 0 Div 1J8 J28

Beta

Filter 3 Filter 4Div 0 Div 1J8 J28

Gamma

Filter 5 Filter 6Div 0 Div 1J8 J28

Slot 1

Slot 1

Slot 6Slot 2 Slot 4Slot 3 Slot 5

Slot 2 Slot 3

Figure 104: Filter Numbering

Continued on next page

Page 300: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 298 November, 2007

MODCELL TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued

Configure TDU1 Port Map (continued)

Step Action

11 Follow the table below to determine Filter Type setting:

IF TDU1 Port is connected to ... THEN set “Filter Type” to ...

Modcell 3.0 Filter Modcell3.0

Dual Duplex Filter DualDuplexer

No Filter NoFilterPanel

12 Follow the table below to determine Coupler Type setting:

IF TDU1 Port is connected to ... THEN set “Coupler Type” to ...

J3 Connector of a Modcell 3.0 Filter Incident

J2 Connector of a Modcell 3.0 Filter Reflected

J41 Connector of a Dual Duplex Filter SwitchedBDT

No Filter NoCoupler

13 Follow the table below to determine Filter Number setting:

IF TDU1 Port is connected to ...

… AND the filter is in physical slot location …

THEN set “Filter Number” to …

1 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

5 5

Modcell 3.0 Filter

6 6

1 1,2

2 3,4 Dual Duplex Filter

3 5,6

No Filter N/A _NoFP_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 104, on page 297, for an example of filter slot numbering.

Continued on next page

Page 301: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 299 November, 2007

MODCELL TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued

Configure TDU1 Port Map (continued)

Step Action

14 Follow the table below to determine FP RF Path Num setting:

IF TDU 1 Port is connected to …

… AND the following transmit ports are being

used on the filter …

THEN set “FP RF Path Num” to ...

J8 only 1

J8 and J9 1 Triplex Modcell 3.0 Filter

J9 only 2

Duplex Modcell 3.0 Filter,

Dual Duplex Filter, or

No Filter Panel

N/A 1

15 Repeat Steps 9 -14 for each remaining Port Numbers.

16 Proceed to the procedure Configure TDU2 Port Map on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 302: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 300 November, 2007

MODCELL TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued

Configure TDU2 Port Map

Follow the procedure to update the TDU2 port map information.

Step Action

1 Set TDU Number to 2 as shown in Figure 105 below.

Figure 105: TDU 2 – BTS RF Test Path Window

2 Set the Equipped field (located below tab) as shown below:

IF TDU 1 is ... THEN ...

Equipped (See Note)

c) Place a check mark (√ ) in the Equipped field (top left of window)

d) Proceed to Step 3 on the next page.

Not Equipped c) Uncheck the Equipped field d) Proceed to MODCELL RADIO

RF TEST PATH MAP TAB on page 304.

NOTE: TDU 2 Equipped means: The frame must contain UCRs and the radios must be using a TDU to perform Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC). Verify that the TDU is connected to the same OneBTS filters used by the UCRs.

Continued on next page

TDU Number

Page 303: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 301 November, 2007

MODCELL TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued

Configure TDU2 Port Map (continued)

Step Action

3 Set External RFS Cable Input to None.

4 In the Test Unit Location box set the Digital Shelf to 1.

5 In the Test Unit Location box set the Filter Shelf to 1.

6 In the Test Unit Location box set Slot Number to 2.

7 Beginning with TDU 2 Port Number 1, trace the cable to the connection on the filter.

8 Follow the table below to determine Sector setting:

IF TDU2 Port is connected to …

… AND equipped in filter slot …

THEN set “Sector” to ...

1 or 2 Alpha

3 or 4 Beta Modcell 3.0 Filter

5 or 6 Gamma

1 Alpha,Alpha

2 Beta,Beta Dual Duplex Filter

3 Gamma,Gamma

No Filter N/A _NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 104, on page 297, for an example of filter slot numbering.

9 Follow the table below to determine Antenna setting:

IF TDU2 Port is connected to …

… AND using … THEN set “Antenna” to ...

Diversity 0 1 Modcell 3.0 Filter

Diversity 1 2

Port J11 1 Dual Duplex Filter

Port J31 2

No Filter N/A _NC_

10 Follow the table below to determine Filter Type setting:

IF TDU2 Port is connected to ... THEN set “Filter Type” to ...

Modcell 3.0 Filter Modcell3.0

Dual Duplex Filter DualDuplexer

No Filter NoFilterPanel

Continued on next page

Page 304: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 302 November, 2007

MODCELL TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued

Configure TDU2 Port Map (continued)

Step Action

11 Follow the table below to determine Coupler Type setting:

IF TDU2 Port is connected to ... THEN ...

Modcell 3.0 Filter, or Dual Duplex Filter

DPD

No Filter NoCoupler

12 Follow the table below to determine Filter Number setting:

IF TDU2 Port is connected to ... THEN set “Filter Number” to …

Filter 1 1

Filter 2 2

Filter 3 3

Filter 4 4

Filter 5 5

Filter 6 6

No Filter _NoFP_

NOTE: This setting refers to the actual Filter number and NOT the physical slot number. Refer to Figure 104, on page 297, for more information on how filters are numbered.

13 Follow the table below to determine FP RF Path Num setting:

IF TDU 2 Port is connected to … THEN set “FP RF Path Num” to …

a coupler on the J9 port of a Triplex filter

2

a coupler on the J8 port of a Duplex or Triplex filter, or

any port on a Dual Duplex filter

1

14 Repeat Steps 8-14 for each Port Number.

15 Proceed to the procedure Set Radio Tab to Default on the next page.

Page 305: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 303 November, 2007

MODCELL TDU RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued

Set Radio Tab to Default

Follow the procedure below to set the Radio RF Test Path Map to their default values. NOTE: The HD frame will support TDUs, or MCRs, but not both. If the TDU Path Map is used, then set the MCR Tab to default values.

Step Action

1 From the BTS RF Test Path Map window, click on the Radio RF Test Path Map tab. See below.

Figure 106: Radio RF Test Path Map Tab

2 Click Recall button in the Configuration File box.

3 Navigate to the directory below and select the file in bold: C:\Program Files\Lucent Technologies\RMT\config\1bts\IEH\RF TEST PM MCR RF TEST – Unequipped.xml

4 Click Open. NOTE: If the proper file was selected the Equipped field (located below tab) should be unchecked for all Radios (1-6). See Figure 106 above.

5 Proceed to the procedure MODCELL RADIO RF TEST PATH MAP TAB on the next page.

Radio RF Test Path Map Tab Radio Number

Page 306: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 304 November, 2007

MODCELL RADIO RF TEST PATH MAP TAB

Configure the Radio RF Test Path Map Tab

Follow the procedure to update the MCR port map information. The MCR has 3 ports: Port 1 = RC1 (Receive CLGC 1) Port 2 = RC2 (Receive CLGC 2) Port 3 = TONE (Antenna Tests)

NOTE: This procedure should only be used if MCRs are equipped in the frame and used to perform test diagnostics.

Step Action

1 From the BTS RF Test Path Map window, click on the Radio RF Test Path Map tab. See below.

Figure 107: Radio RF Test Path Map Tab

2 Select the Radio Number (start with Radio 1).

Continued on next page

Radio RF Test Path Map Tab

Equipped Field

Radio Number

Page 307: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 305 November, 2007

MODCELL RADIO RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued

Configure the Radio RF Test Path Map Tab (continued)

Step Action

3 Set the Equipped field (located below tab) as shown below:

IF the MCR is ... … AND connected to …

THEN ...

OneBTS Amplifiers e) Place a check mark (√ ) in the Equipped field (top left of window)

f) Proceed to Step 4.

Equipped

CAU (SII LAC) c) Uncheck the Equipped field d) Proceed to Step 4.

Not Equipped N/A e) Uncheck the Equipped field f) Proceed to Step 4.

4 In the Test Unit Location box set the Digital Shelf field as shown below:

IF the MCRs are connected to filters in the ...

THEN set “Digital Shelf” to ...

Primary Cabinet 1

Growth #1 Cabinet 2

5 In the Test Unit Location box, set the Filter Shelf to 1.

6 Proceed to Radio Tab – Port 1 and Port 2 on next page.

Continued on next page

Page 308: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 306 November, 2007

MODCELL RADIO RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued

Radio Tab – Port 1 and Port 2

Follow the procedure to update the following MCR Ports: Port 1 = RC1 (Receive CLGC 1) Port 2 = RC2 (Receive CLGC 2)

Start with Port 1 and then repeat the steps for Port 2.

Step Action

1 Trace the RC1 cable to the connection on the filter.

2 Follow the table below to determine Sector setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to a …

… AND Equipped in filter slot …

THEN set “Sector” to ...

1 Alpha

2 Beta Dual Duplex Filter

3 Gamma

No Filter N/A _NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 104, on page 297, for an example of filter slot numbering.

3 Follow the table below to determine Antenna setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to …

… AND the Diversity number is …

THEN set “Antenna” to ...

Diversity 0 1 Dual Duplex Filter in the Primary Frame Diversity 1 2

Diversity 0 3 Dual Duplex Filter in the Growth-1 Frame Diversity 1 4

No Filter N/A _NC_

4 Follow the table below to determine Filter Type setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to ... THEN set “Filter Type” to ...

Dual Duplex Filter DualDuplexer

No Filter NoFilterPanel

5 Follow the table below to determine Coupler Type setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to ... THEN set “Coupler Type” to ...

Dual Duplex Filter DPD

No Filter NoCoupler

Continued on next page

Page 309: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 307 November, 2007

MODCELL RADIO RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued

Radio Tab – Port 1 and Port 2 (continued)

Step Action

6 Follow the table below to determine Filter Number setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to … THEN set “Filter Number” to ...

Dual Duplex Filter 1 – 6

No Filter _NC_

NOTE: Use the filter number where the Radio’s RC1/RC2 Port is connected. Refer to Figure 104, on page 297, for an example of filter slot numbering.

7 Set the FP RF Path Num to 1.

8 Trace the RC2 cable to the connection on the filter and then repeat Steps 2 – 7.

9 Proceed to MCR Tab – Port 3 below.

MCR Tab – Port 3 Follow the procedure to update the following:

Port 3 = TONE (Antenna Test)

Step Action

1 Trace the RC3 cables to the connection on the filter.

2 Follow the table below to determine Sector setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to a …

… AND Equipped in filter slot …

THEN set “Sector” to ...

1 Alpha,Alpha

2 Beta,Beta Dual Duplex Filter

3 Gamma,Gamma

No Filter N/A _NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 104, on page 297, for an example of filter slot numbering.

3 Follow the table below to determine Antenna setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to … THEN set “Antenna” to ...

Dual Duplex Filter in the Primary Frame 1,2

Dual Duplex Filter in the Growth-1 Frame 3,4

No Filter _NC_

Continued on next page

Page 310: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 308 November, 2007

MODCELL RADIO RF TEST PATH MAP TAB, Continued

MCR Tab – Port 3 (continued)

Step Action

4 Follow the table below to determine Filter Type setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to ... THEN set “Filter Type” to ...

Dual Duplex Filter DualDuplexer

No Filter NoFilterPanel

5 Follow the table below to determine Coupler Type setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to ... THEN set “Coupler Type” to ...

Dual Duplex Filter SwitchedBDT

No Filter NoCoupler

6 Follow the table below to determine Filter Number setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to …

… AND the filter is in slot …

THEN set “Filter Number” to ...

1 1,2

2 3,4 Dual Duplex Filter

3 5,6

No Filter N/A _NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 104, on page 297, for an example of filter slot numbering.

7 Set the FP RF Path Num to 1.

8 Repeat MODCELL RADIO RF TEST PATH MAP TAB on page 304 (starting with Step 2) for each equipped MCR.

9 Proceed to the FINAL PROCEDURES on page 327.

Page 311: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 309 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0B BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION

Section Description

This section describes the procedures to verify and edit the BTS RF Test Path Map on the following products:

Modcell 4.0B Compact 4.0B Base Station 4400 (with MCRs) Base Station 4401 Base Station 8401 Base Station 8420 Base Station 2400 450MHz Standard Compact 450MHz Compact RU/BU

When to Update the BTS RF Test Path Map

BTS RF Test Path Maps are set in the factory based on the cabinet configuration and equipage. If problems are experienced during the integration efforts related to the BTS RF Test Path Map and/or when field changes are made to the cabinet, use the following procedures to update the path map information. This section gives instructions for populating each field of the BTS RF Test Path Map.

Configuration Aid Document (CA 100)

The procedures outlined in this section are supported with the .xml files packaged in the Configuration Aid (CA 100) document. The CA 100 document is available through the Alcatel-Lucent Customer Information Center (CIC) – see CONFIGURATION AID (CA100) INSTALLATION on page 14 for information on accessing and loading this document. The CA 100 document includes:

• The various cell configurations, • Configuration overview, • Schematics, • Backplane programming information, • Applicable RF power calibration sections, and • Packaged XML files.

Continued on next page

Page 312: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 310 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0B BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Test Equipment Information

The following provides test equipment information that pertains to the various Modcell configurations.

MCR Connections

For Flexent RF paths, the MCR connects to a Dual Duplex Filter (See Exception below). The MCR supports both Antenna Test and Closed Loop Gain Control (CLGC). The following ports on the MCR are used for these functions:

MCR Test Port Dual Duplex Filter Connection Function

RC1 J11 CLGC

(for Tx1 port)

RC2 J31 CLGC

(for Tx2 port)

TONE J41 Antenna Test Exception: Note the following configuration:

Legacy Modcell Primary frame with a Modcell 4.0 Growth 1 (supporting 8 – 850 B-band Carriers)

In this configuration, radios 4, 5 and 6 can optionally be MCRs which connect to Modcell 3.0 Filters in the Legacy Primary frame. The MCR in this configuration does not support Antenna Test and CLGC and the RC1, RC2 and TONE ports are not used.

UCR450 Connections

The UCR450 connects to a Dual Duplex Filter (Modcell 3 Filters are not supported.) The UCR450 is functionally similar to the MCR, except that the UCR450 supports CLGC only. The UCR450 radio does not provide Antenna Functional test capability. The following ports on the UCR450 are used for these functions:

UCR450 Port Dual Duplex Filter Connection Function

CLGC 1 J11 CLGC

CLGC 2 J31 CLGC NOTE: In the UCR450, there is no Port 3 or “TONE” port.

Radio Port Terminology

This section will refer to the UCR450 using the MCR port terminology. Port 1 (CLGC 1) will be referred to as RC1. Port 2 (CLGC 2) will be refereed to as RC2.

Port Number UCR450 Port Label

MCR Port Equivalent Function

Port 1 CLGC 1 RC1 CLGC

Port 2 CLGC 2 RC2 CLGC

Continued on next page

Page 313: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 311 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0B BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Save Original TDU RF Test Path Map

Follow the procedure below to save the original TDU RF Test Path Map data on the BTS RF Test Path Map window.

Step Action

1 Click Config → RF Calibration → BTS RF Test Path Map from the main RMT window. The BTS RF Test Path Map window will appear as shown below:

Figure 108: TDU RF Test Path Map Tab

2 Verify that the TDU RF Test Path Map tab is selected as shown in Figure 108 above.

Continued on next page

TDU RF Test Path Maps Tab URC to Update Box

Page 314: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 312 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0B BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Save Original TDU RF Test Path Map (continued)

Step Action

3 Select the appropriate URC ID.

IF saving ... THEN set “Select the URC you want to update” to …

URC 1 1

URC 2 2

URC 3 3

4 Click Save in the Configuration File Box.

5 Type the filename as shown below and save it to a directory as desired. Cell X Original TDU RF Test Where: X = Cell Number NOTES:

Refer to SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE on page 329 for procedures to create a directory to store files.

When saving an xml file from the TDU RF Test Path Map tab, all TDU configuration data is saved (TDUs 1-4).

6 Click Save in the Save As Box.

7 Proceed to the procedure Save Original Radio RF Test Path Map on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 315: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 313 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0B BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Save Original Radio RF Test Path Map

Follow the procedure below to save the original Radio RF Test Path Map data on the BTS RF Test Path Map window.

Step Action

1 From the BTS RF Test Path Map window, click on the Radio RF Test Path Map tab. See below.

Figure 109: Radio RF Test Path Map Tab

2 Select the appropriate URC ID.

IF saving ... THEN set “Select the URC you want to update” to …

URC 1 1

URC 2 2

URC 3 3

Continued on next page

Radio RF Test Path Map Tab URC to Update

Page 316: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 314 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0B BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Save Original Radio RF Test Path Map (continued)

Step Action

3 Click Save in the Configuration File Box.

4 Type the filename as shown below and save it to a directory as desired. Cell X Original MCR RF Test Where X = Cell Number NOTES:

Refer to SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE on page 329 for procedures to create a directory to store files.

When saving an xml file from the Radio RF Test Path Map tab, all MCR configuration data is saved (MCR 1 through MCR 6)

5 Proceed to Configure TDU RF Test Path Maps Tab on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 317: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 315 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0B BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Configure TDU RF Test Path Maps Tab

Follow the steps bellow to configure the RF Test Path Maps

Step Action

1 Click on the TDU RF Test Path Maps tab.

2 Click Recall button in the Configuration File box.

3 Navigate to the directory below and select the file in bold: C:\Program Files\Lucent Technologies\RMT\config\1bts\IEH\RF TEST PM TDU RF TEST – Unequipped.xml

4 Click Open. NOTE: If the proper file was selected the Equipped field (located below tab) should be unchecked for all TDUs (1-4). See Figure 110 below:

Figure 110: Unequipped TDU RF Test Path Map

Continued on next page

Equipped Field (unchecked for TDU 1 – 4)

Page 318: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 316 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0B BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Configure TDU RF Test Path Maps Tab (continued)

Step Action

5 IF the frame type is ... THEN ...

Modcell 4.0B Primary (with Intelligent Antenna Calibration Unit (IACU))

Select the Equipped field for TDU 1 and verify that the checkmark appears. See Figure 111 below. (TDUs 2 – 4 should remain unequipped) NOTE: Since the IACU is located in the TDU1 slot, equipping TDU1 in the backplane is actually equipping the IACU.

Any other configuration Skip this step and proceed to step 6.

Figure 111: Equipped TDU1 RF Test Path Map – for IA only

6 Determine the next procedure using the table below:

IF frame type is … THEN proceed to the procedure ...

Base Station without Filters BASE STATION (WITHOUT FILTERS) RADIO RF TEST PATH MAPS on page 326.

Any other configuration Configure the Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab on the next page.

Continued on next page

Equipped Field (checked for TDU1 only)

Page 319: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 317 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0B BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Configure the Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab

Follow the procedure to update the Radio RF Test Path Map information. The MCR has 3 ports:

Port 1 = RC1 (Receive CLGC 1) Port 2 = RC2 (Receive CLGC 2) Port 3 = TONE (Antenna Tests)

WARNING: DO NOT perform this procedure on any Base Station without Filters, proceed instead to BASE STATION (WITHOUT FILTERS) RADIO RF TEST PATH MAPS on page 326.

Step Action

1 From the BTS RF Test Path Map window, click on the Radio RF Test Path Maps tab. See below.

Figure 112: Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab

2 Select the Radio Number (start with Radio 1).

Continued on next page

Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab

Equipped Field

Radio Number

Page 320: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 318 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0B BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Configure the Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab (continued)

Step Action

3 Set the Equipped field (located below tab) as shown below:

IF the MCR is... THEN ...

Equipped g) Place a check mark (√ ) in the Equipped field (top left of window)

h) Proceed to Step 4.

Not Equipped g) Uncheck the Equipped field h) Proceed to Step 4.

4 In the Test Unit Location box set the Digital Shelf field as shown below:

IF the MCRs are connected to filters in the ...

THEN set “Digital Shelf” to ...

Primary Cabinet 1

Growth #1 Cabinet 2

Growth #2 Cabinet 3

Growth #3 Cabinet 4

5 In the Test Unit Location box, set the Filter Shelf to 1.

6 IF the cell type is ... THEN ...

Base Station 8420 with Filters Proceed to Radio Tab–Port 3 on page 323.

Any other cell configuration Proceed to Radio Tab – Port 1 and Port 2 on next page.

Continued on next page

Page 321: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 319 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0B BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Radio Tab – Port 1 and Port 2

Follow the procedure to update the following MCR Ports: Port 1 = RC1 (Receive CLGC 1) Port 2 = RC2 (Receive CLGC 2)

Start with Port 1 and then repeat the steps for Port 2. WARNING: DO NOT perform this procedure if the frame is a Base Station 8420 or any Base Station without filters.

For any Base Station without Filters proceed instead to BASE STATION (WITHOUT FILTERS) RADIO RF TEST PATH MAPS on page 326.

For Base Station 8420 with Filters proceed to Radio Tab–Port 3 on page 323.

Step Action

1 Trace the MCR RC1 cable to the connection on the filter.

2 Follow the table below to determine Sector setting:

IF the cell type is … … AND radio port is connected to …

THEN set “Sector” to ...

Filter Slot 1 Alpha

Filter Slot 2 Beta

Filter Slot 3 Gamma

Filter Slot 4 Delta

Filter Slot 5 Epsilon

Filter Slot 6 Zeta

Modcell 4.0B (with sector 4, 5 or 6 equipped)

No Filter (or is not used)

_NC_

Filter Slot 1 Alpha

Filter Slot 2 Beta

Filter Slot 3 Gamma

Filter Slot 4 Alpha

Filter Slot 5 Beta

Filter Slot 6 Gamma

Any other Cell Configuration (1 – 3 Sectors)

No Filter (or is not used)

_NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 113 on the next page for an example of filter slot numbering.

Continued on next page

Page 322: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 320 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0B BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Figure 113: Filter Slot Numbering

Continued on next page

Page 323: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 321 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0B BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Radio Tab – Port 1 and Port 2 (continued)

Step Action

3 Follow the table below to determine Antenna setting:

IF the frame is … … AND radio port is connected to …

THEN set “Antenna” to...

850 Diversity 0 Filter 1

850 Diversity 1 Filter 2

PCS Diversity 0 Filter 3

PCS Diversity 1 Filter 4

Base Station 8401

No Filter (or is not used) _NC_

Diversity 0 Filter in Slot 1,2 or 3 (Filter 1, 3 or 5)

1

Diversity 1 Filter in Slot 1,2 or 3 (Filter 2, 4 or 6)

2

Diversity 0 Filter in Slot 4, 5 or 6 (Filter 7, 9 or 11)

3

Modcell 4.0B Primary (with Intelligent Antenna Calibration Unit (IACU))

Diversity 1 Filter in Slot 4, 5 or 6 (Filter 8, 10 or 12)

4

Diversity 0 Filter in Slot 1,2 or 3 (Filter 1, 3 or 5)

5 Modcell 4.0B PCS Growth-1 (with IACU equipped in the M4.0B 850 Primary Frame)

Diversity 1 Filter in Slot 1,2 or 3 (Filter 2, 4 or 6)

6

Diversity 0 Filter in a Primary frame 1

Diversity 1 Filter in a Primary frame 2

Diversity 0 Filter in a Growth 1, 2 or 3 frame

3

Diversity 1 Filter in a Growth 1, 2, or 3 frame

4

Any other cabinet type

No Filter (or is not used) _NC_

Continued on next page

Page 324: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 322 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0B BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Radio Tab – Port 1 and Port 2 (continued)

Step Action

4 Follow the table below to determine Filter Type setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to ... THEN set “Filter Type” to ...

Dual Duplex Filter DualDuplexer

No Filter (or is not used) NoFilterPanel

5 Follow the table below to determine Coupler Type setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to ... THEN set “Coupler Type” to ...

Dual Duplex Filter DPD

No Filter (or is not used) NoCoupler

6 Follow the table below to determine Filter Number setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to … THEN set “Filter Number” to...

Dual Duplex Filter in Primary or Growth Frame

1 – 12 NOTE: Use the filter number where the Radio’s RC1/RC2 Port is connected. Refer to Figure 100 on page 284 for an example of filter slot numbering.

No Filter (or is not used) _NC_

7 Set the FP RF Path Num to 1.

8 Follow the table below to determine if the MCR RC2 port is being used:

IF the MCR RC2 port is ... THEN ...

Connected Repeat steps 2 – 7 for the RC2 cable

Not Connected Proceed to step 9.

9 Proceed to the procedure Radio Tab–Port 3 on the next page.

Continued on next page

Page 325: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 323 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0B BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Radio Tab–Port 3 Follow the procedure to update the following:

Port 3 = TONE (Antenna Test) WARNING: DO NOT perform this procedure If the frame is a Base Station 8420 without Filters, proceed instead to BASE STATION (WITHOUT FILTERS) RADIO RF TEST PATH MAPS on page 326.

Step Action

1 Trace the MCR TONE cable to the connection on the filter.

2 Follow the table below to determine Sector setting:

IF the cell type is … … AND radio port is connected to …

THEN set “Sector” to ...

Filter Slot 1 Alpha,Alpha

Filter Slot 2 Beta,Beta

Filter Slot 3 Gamma,Gamma

Filter Slot 4 Delta,Delta

Filter Slot 5 Epsilon,Epsilon

Filter Slot 6 Zeta,Zeta

Modcell 4.0B (with sector 4, 5 or 6 equipped)

No Filter (or is not used)

_NC_

Filter Slot 1 Alpha,Alpha

Filter Slot 2 Beta,Beta

Filter Slot 3 Gamma,Gamma

Filter Slot 4 Alpha,Alpha

Filter Slot 5 Beta,Beta

Filter Slot 6 Gamma,Gamma

Any other Cell Configuration (1-3 Sectors)

No Filter (or is not used)

_NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 113 on page 320 for an example of filter slot numbering.

Continued on next page

Page 326: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 324 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0B BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Radio Tab–Port 3 (continued)

Step Action

3 Follow the table below to determine Antenna setting:

IF the frame is … … AND radio port is connected to …

THEN set “Antenna” to...

850 Dual Duplex Filter 1,2

PCS Dual Duplex Filter in a Dual-Band Frame (with both 850 and PCS)

3,4

Base Station 8401, or

Base Station 8420 (with Filters)

PCS Dual Duplex Filter in a Non-Dual Band Frame (with no 850 in frame)

1,2

Dual Duplex Filter in Slot 1,2 or 3 (Filter 1 through 6)

1,2 Modcell 4.0B Primary with Intelligent Antenna Calibration Unit (IACU)

Dual Duplex Filter in Slot 4, 5 or 6 (Filter 7 through 12)

3,4

Modcell 4.0B PCS Growth-1 (with IACU equipped in the M4.0B 850 Primary Frame)

Dual Duplex Filter in Slot 1,2 or 3 (Filter 1 through 6)

5,6

Dual Duplex Filter in the Primary Frame

1,2

Dual Duplex Filter in the Growth-1, Growth-2, or Growth-3 Frame

3,4

Any other cabinet type

No Filter (or is not used) _NC_

4 Follow the table below to determine Filter Type setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to ... THEN set “Filter Type” to ...

Dual Duplex Filter DualDuplexer

No Filter (or is not used) NoFilterPanel

5 Follow the table below to determine Coupler Type setting:

IF MCR Port is connected to ... THEN set “Coupler Type” to ...

Dual Duplex Filter SwitchedBDT

No Filter (or is not used) NoCoupler

Continued on next page

Page 327: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 325 November, 2007

MODCELL 4.0B BTS RF TEST PATH MAP CONFIGURATION, Continued

Radio Tab–Port 3 (continued)

Step Action

6 Follow the table below to determine Filter Number setting:

IF the cell type is … … AND radio port is connected to …

THEN set “Filter Number” to...

Filter Slot 1 7,8

Filter Slot 2 9,10

Filter Slot 3 11,12

Filter Slot 4 1,2

Filter Slot 5 3,4

Base Station 8401, or

Base Station 8420 (with Filters)

Filter Slot 6 5,6

Filter Slot 1 1,2

Filter Slot 2 3,4

Filter Slot 3 5,6

Filter Slot 4 7,8

Filter Slot 5 9,10

Filter Slot 6 11,12

Any other Cell Configuration

No Filter (or is not used)

_NC_

NOTE: Refer to Figure 113 on page 320 for an example of filter slot numbering.

7 Set the FP RF Path Num to 1.

8 Repeat the procedure Configure the Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab on page 317 (starting with Step 2) for each equipped MCR.

9 Proceed to the FINAL PROCEDURES on page 327.

Page 328: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 326 November, 2007

BASE STATION (WITHOUT FILTERS) RADIO RF TEST PATH MAPS

Base Station (without Filters) Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab

Antenna Functional tests and CLGC are not supported in the Base Stations without filters. Follow the procedure below to unequip the Radio RF Test Path Map for all radios.

Step Action

1 From the BTS RF Test Path Map window, click on the Radio RF Test Path Maps tab. See below.

Figure 114: Base Station (without filters) Radio RF Test Path Map

2 Click Recall button in the Configuration File box.

3 Navigate to the directory below and select the file in bold: C:\Program Files\Lucent Technologies\RMT\config\1bts\IEH\RF TEST PM MCR RF TEST - Unequipped.xml

4 Click Open. NOTE: If the proper file was selected the Equipped field (located below tab) should be unchecked for all Radios (1-6). See Figure 94 above.

5 Proceed to the FINAL PROCEDURES on page 327..

Radio RF Test Path Maps Tab Radio Number

Page 329: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 327 November, 2007

FINAL PROCEDURES

Apply the BTS RF Test Path Map

After configuring the BTS RF Test Path Map, the data must be applied to the backplane. Use the procedure below to Apply the changes and perform final steps.

Step Action

1 Click Apply from the BTS Primary RF Path Map Window.

IF ... THEN ...

More that 1 URC is present in the frame.

Proceed to Step 2.

Only 1 URC is present in the frame Proceed to Step 3.

2 Click Confirm in the Synchronized EEPROM Write window.

Figure 115: Synchronized EEPROM Write

NOTE: RMT checks for the existence of other equipped URCs and prompt the user to update the backplane. Verify that all equipped URCs are shown and checked (√).

3 Click DISCONNECT on the RMT screen.

4 Click File → Exit.

5 Remove all test equipment connections from the cell.

Continued on next page

Page 330: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 328 November, 2007

FINAL PROCEDURES, Continued

Apply the BTS RF Test Path Map (continued)

Step Action

6 Reconnect the T1/E1.

7 Determine the method to power cycle the digital shelf

IF ... THEN ...

trying to maintain GPS lock Reseat all the equipped URCs. CAUTION: May need to unscrew URCs before reseating the packs.

Not trying to maintain GPS lock

Reset the Digital Shelf Circuit Breaker as shown in Figure 116.

8 Secure the cabinet door.

9 Procedure complete.

Figure 116: IOU Digital Shelf Circuit Breaker

Page 331: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 329 November, 2007

SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE

Save Settings Follow the procedure below to create a new folder and to save settings (i.e. xml file) to the

newly created folder.

Step Action

1 Click Save under the Configuration File box.

2 Click the down arrow and select the My Documents Folder.

3 Create a new folder by clickin on the Create New Folder Icon.

4 Type in a name for the new folder. Example: Cell 123

Continued on next page

Rename the Folder by typing the new name in this box

Page 332: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 330 November, 2007

SAVE CONFIGURATION FILE, Continued

Save Settings (continued)

Step Action

5 Double-Click on the new folder created in step 4 to open the directory.

6 Type in the file name in the File name box.

7 Click Save.

Page 333: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 331 November, 2007

HOW TO RECALL AND APPLY XML FILE

Recalling Existing XML File

This procedure below is used during field installation upgrades if using a good known XML file from another cell, or using an XML file previously generated and stored on the laptop. document.

Step Action

1 Connect with RMT.

2 Click Config → RF Calibration → BTS RF Test Path Map, from the RMT main screen.

3 Save the original BTS Primary RF Path Map on your laptop.

4 Select either the TDU RF Test Path Maps or Radio RF Test Path Maps tab and click on Recall under the Configuration File heading.

5 Select the desired XML file from your laptop, or of the CA 100 file directory. Below is an example only of XML files for Configuration 101 PR-1.

6 Open and Apply the RF Test Path Map to the backplane. See Apply the BTS RF Test Path Map on page 327.

Page 334: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 332 November, 2007

This page intentionally left blank.

Page 335: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 333 November, 2007

RF POWER CALIBRATION PROCEDURES

RMT 29.0 Job Aid Section JA400

GENERAL INFORMATION

Purpose All RF Power Calibration procedures have been removed from the RMT Job Aid. RF Power Calibration procedures are now in the CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual (401-703-408). The CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual can be accessed and downloaded at:

https://wireless.support.lucent.com/amps

Login with valid user name and password,

select: Release Information

select: CDMA RF Power Calibration Manual

Page 336: 64909958-Job-Aid

Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary See notice on cover page

RMT 29.0 Job Aid 334 November, 2007

This page intentionally left blank.